Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Operators Guide
PN 752004.908-US
SMN 10368377
Operators Guide
Operators Guide
Operators Guide
Operators Guide
Operators Guide
Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system
EC REP
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc.
Newark, DE 19714
U.S.A.
www.siemens.com/diagnostics
2008/08
98/79/EC
PN 752004.908-US
2002, 2003, 2005, 2006, 2008 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. (formerly Dade Behring)
All rights reserved.
The Dimension Customer Information Library, Dimension software, and reports produced by the
Dimension software have been provided pursuant to the following agreement containing restrictions on
their use. They are also protected by federal regulations and cannot be copied, distributed, transmitted,
transcribed, or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means, to any third
parties, without the express written consent of Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc., Newark, DE, 19714.
Siemens has validated the provided instructions, reagents, instrument, software and customizable features
for this system to optimize product performance and meet product specifications. User-defined
modifications are not supported by Siemens as they may affect the performance of the system and test
results. It is the responsibility of the user to validate modifications to these instructions, instruments,
reagents or software provided by Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc.
The material in this manual is believed adequate for the intended use of the Dimension RxL Max clinical
chemistry system. If this instrument system acquires a Reagent Management System (RMS) module, an
RMS Operator's Guide will be shipped with the RMS and should be placed behind the RMS tab in this
manual. If the system or its individual components are used for purposes other than those specified herein,
confirmation of their validity and suitability must be obtained; otherwise, Siemens does not guarantee
results and assumes no obligation or liability. Siemens warrants that the material itself does not infringe
any United States patents. No further warranty is expressed or implied.
DataFusion, DBNet, Dimension, Emit, Flex, QuikLYTE, and Max are trademarks of Siemens Healthcare
Diagnostics.
Krytox is a registered trademark of E.I. duPont de Nemours & Company, Wilmington, DE 19880
Tufoil is a registered trademark of Fluoramics, Inc. Westwood, NJ
Intralipid is a trademark of Fresenius Kabi Clayton LP
Legal Requirement
CE Mark
The device described in this manual bears a CE mark which confirms the
observance of essential requirements of the following European directives:
If the device has a serial number on the type plate greater than or equal
to 220570-AX, it corresponds to the following directive: 98/79/EC
(In Vitro Diagnostics Directive).
If the device has a serial number on the type plate less than 220570-AX,
it corresponds to the following directive: 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive).
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Preface
About This Manual ................................................................................................. xv
Intended Use ..................................................................................................... xv
Use of this Manual ............................................................................................. xv
How this Manual is Organized ............................................................................ xvi
Using this Manual with other Dimension Modules ............................................. xvi
Components of a Typical Procedure in this Manual ............................................ xvii
For Additional Help ............................................................................................ xvii
Manual Reviews Charts
Maintenance Logs
Training Checklist
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
2006/12
Table of Contents
ii
2006/12
Table of Contents
2006/12
iii
Table of Contents
iv
2006/12
Table of Contents
2006/12
Table of Contents
vi
2006/12
Table of Contents
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
2006/12
vii
Table of Contents
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
viii
2006/12
Table of Contents
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-7
2006/12
ix
Table of Contents
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-32
6-35
6-35
6-35
6-55
6-55
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-61
6-61
6-62
6-63
2006/12
Table of Contents
2006/12
xi
Table of Contents
xii
2006/12
Table of Contents
Appendix
Photometric Calibration (or Verification) Setup Flow Chart ................................. A-3
Photometric Calibration (or Verification) Review Flow Chart ............................... A-4
Help Keys ............................................................................................................... A-5
Operating Conditions Status Area Icons ............................................................... A-6
1 - Service Key ............................................................................................ A-6
2 - Reagent Temperature ............................................................................. A-6
3 - Cuvette Temperature............................................................................... A-7
4 - UPS (Uninterruptible Power Source) ....................................................... A-7
5 - HM Vessel Feeder Empty ....................................................................... A-8
Aliquot Wheel (non-HM) ......................................................................... A-8
6 - Cuvette Film Cartridge ............................................................................ A-8
7 - Reagent Manager ................................................................................... A-8
8 - Printer ..................................................................................................... A-9
9 - Short Sample .......................................................................................... A-9
10 - Check Needs ........................................................................................ A-9
11 - Alarm Status .......................................................................................... A-9
Keystroke Combinations ....................................................................................... A-10
Operating Passwords............................................................................................. A-12
Test Report Messages and Reference Range Indicators ...................................... A-13
Test Results with Test Report Messages ............................................................ A-13
Test Results with Reference Range Indicators .................................................... A-13
Understanding Test Report Messages ..................................................................
Dilution Examples ..............................................................................................
Dilution of a Sample .....................................................................................
Mixture of a Sample and a Known Standard .......................................................
50% Recovery of a Known Standard Using a Sample ..................................
A-14
A-20
A-20
A-21
A-22
Index
2006/12
xiii
Table of Contents
xiv
2006/12
CLSI/NCCLS reference...
Clinical and Laboratory
Standards Institute. Clinical
Laboratory Technical
Procedure Manuals. Approved
Guideline. CLSI/NCCLS
publication GP2-A3, Villanova,
Pa., NCCLS; 1996.
2006/12
xv
Contains
1: Introducing
Customizing considerations...
The Customizing module
covers procedures that are
typically done at the time of
installation to meet the specific
preferences of your laboratory
operations. Most users will not
need to perform the procedures in this module during
day-to-day operation.
xvi
2: Using
3: Maintaining
4: Aligning
5: Troubleshooting
6: Customizing
7: User-Defined Methods
2006/12
OPERATING MENU
CALIBRATION SET UP
METHOD:
Operator:
LOT:
Status:
Calibration Expires:
Calibrator Product / Lot:
----
Start at Position:
LEVELS BOTTLE VALUE SEG CUP
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
F2:
F8: QC YES / NO
225157A-308
2006/12
xvii
xviii
2006/12
Use the Notes column to document all revisions made to a method and/or any method revision levels sent by manufacturer.
Manuals must be reviewed by supervisor/lab manager at a minimum frequency of once per year per CLSI/NCCLS GP2-A guidelines.
Use the Notes column to document all revisions made to a method and/or any method revision levels sent by manufacturer.
Manuals must be reviewed by supervisor/lab manager at a minimum frequency of once per year per CLSI/NCCLS GP2-A guidelines.
ATTENTION!
Do Not Mark on these log sheets.
Use them as Masters to make copies as needed.
This package of Maintenance Log Masters contains 12 logs:
Log 1 - Daily Maintenance (Indirect IMT)
Log 2 - Daily System Check (Indirect IMT)
Log 3 - Monthly Maintenance (Indirect IMT)
Log 4 - Daily Maintenance (RMS)
Log 5 - Daily System Check (RMS)
Log 6 - Daily Maintenance (HM)
Log 7 - Daily System Check (HM)
Log 8 - Weekly/Monthly Maintenance (HM)
Log 9 - Daily Maintenance (HM and RMS)
Log 10 - Daily System Check (HM and RMS)
Log 11 - Electrolyte Results
Log 12 - Instrument Log
You will not use all of these logs. Only five logs are needed per instrument. The instrument configuration determines which of the 12 log sheets will be used. Refer to the following table:
Configuration
Logs to Use
1, 2, 3, 11, 12
4, 5, 3, 11, 12
6, 7, 8, 11, 12
9, 10, 8, 11, 12
2006/12
Run
Empty
Record
System
Cuvette
Reagent Temp
Waste Check
Operator
Initials
Comments
2 to 8 C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 1
2006/12
Reagent 1
Mean
SD
Reagent 2
Mean
SD
IMT Sampler
Mean
SD
10% of
10% of
ABS Carton
ABS Carton
ABS Carton
ABS Carton
value 12 3.8 value 12 3.8 value 2 0.8 value 2 1.4
ABS
lot
Oper
Init.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 2
2006/12
Year ______
Date
Monthly
Operator
Initials
*If you run more than 100 IMT samples daily, bleach the IMT system and port every 15 days.
Log 3
2006/12
Reagent
2 to 8
RMS
Hydration
RMS
Reagent
2 to 8
2 to 8
Empty
Cuvette
Waste
Run
System
Check
Operator
Initials
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 4
2006/12
Reagent 1
Mean SD
293 filter:
2.5 to +2.5
ABS
all other filters: Carton
1.5 to +1.5 value 12 3.8
Reagent 2
Mean SD
ABS
Carton
value
12
IMT Sampler
Mean
SD
10% of
10% of
ABS
ABS
Carton
Carton
3.8 value 2 0.8 value 2 1.4
RMS
Mean SD
ABS
Carton
value
12
3.8
ABS
lot
Oper
Init.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 5
2006/12
Record
Cuvette Temp
Record
Reagent Temp
36.8 to 37.2 C
2 to 8 C
Record
Temp
HM
Empty
Cuvette
Waste
Run
System
Check
Operator
Initials
Comments
42 to 44 C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 6
2006/12
293 filter:
2.5 to +2.5
all other filters:
1.5 to +1.5
Reagent 1
Mean
SD
Reagent 2
Mean
SD
ABS Carton
ABS Carton
value 12 3.8 value 12 3.8
0.8
HM
Mean
SD
10% of
ABS
Carton
value 4
1.6
ABS lot
Oper
Init.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 7
2006/12
Year ______
Date
Monthly
Weekly
Operator
Initials
*If more than 100 IMT samples run daily, bleach IMT system port every 15 days.
Log 8
2006/12
Month
&
Year ____________
Reagent
2 to 8
HM
42 to 44
RMS
Hydration
RMS
Reagent
2 to 8
2 to 8
Empty
Cuvette
Waste
Run
System
Check
Operator
Initials
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 9
2006/12
Reagent 1
Mean SD
ABS
Carton
value
12
3.8
Reagent 2
Mean SD
ABS
Carton
value
12
3.8
Sampler
Mean SD
10% of
ABS
Carton
value
2
HM
Mean SD
10% of
ABS
Carton
value
0.8
4
1.6
RMS
Mean SD
ABS
Carton
value
12
3.8
ABS lot
Oper
Init.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Log 10
2006/12
Date
Std A
Na
53
K
53
Cl
40
to
to
to
65
65
55
Air
Liq.
Na
Mean
K
SD
Na
Bottle Value
0.8
0.6
140.00
Mean
Bias
SD
< 0.04
1.0
K
Bottle Value
< 1.4
4.00
Initials
Log 11
2006/12
Log 12
Procedure Performed
Year ______
Comments
2006/12
Date: _______________________
Operators
Key
Other
Activity
Operators
Key
Other
Reference
Reference
Required
Optional
2006/12
Date: _______________________
Operators
Key
Other
# methods:
# methods:
# methods:
# methods:
Configure QC alerts
Define QC products
Define QC panels
Operators
Key
Other
Reference
Reference
Store calibrations
Store QC results
Required
Optional
2
2006/12
Date: _______________________
Operators
Key
Other
Topic: Maintenance
Activity
Reference
Review tubing
Required
Optional
2006/12
Date: _______________________
Operators
Key
Other
Topic: Customization
Activity
Reference
Set password
Define panels
Program QC status
Enter QC ranges
Touchscreen features
Required
Optional
4
2006/12
Date: _______________________
Operators
Key
Other
Operators
Key
Other
Reference
Topic: Resources
Activity
Review TAC contact process
Review XLINK capability
Review Method Inserts
Review Fast Facts
Required
Optional
2006/12
Date: _______________________
Operators
Key
Other
Required
Optional
6
2006/12
Introducing
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
2006/12
1-1
Introducing
1-2
2006/12
Introducing
CB020619-01
2006/12
1-3
Introducing
Features
Performs tests in random order.
Uses the Dade Behring Inc. low-cost-per-test Flex reagent cartridge and
onboard cuvette manufacturing system.
Uses the Dade Behring Inc. exclusive QuikLYTE integrated multisensor
for Na, K, Cl testing.
Performs up to 500 photometric chemistry tests and 300 Na, K, Cl tests
per hour on serum, plasma, urine, or cerebrospinal fluid samples.
Performs up to 167 heterogeneous immunoassays per hour.
Performs automatic reflex testing.
Performs automatic panic reruns.
Uses various sizes of primary sample tubes.
Uses 1.5-mL Dade Behring Inc. sample cups.
Uses 1-mL Dade Behring Inc. SSC containers on top of barcoded tubes for
short volume samples.
Holds up to 44 Flex reagent cartridges in a non-CFC refrigeration
system and up to 88 Flex reagent cartridges in a non-CFC refrigerated
system when the Reagent Management System (RMS) module is installed.
Performs automatic reagent preparation.
Has an easy-to-use computer.
Has ten user-programmable panel keys.
Has the ability to link with other Dade Behring Inc. analyzers through the
Dade Behring Inc. DataFusion system integrator (either with or without
bar code generation capability) or with an Laboratory Information System
(LIS).
Uses a 17-inch touchscreen monitor with visual/audio alerts.
Uses the HIL feature to help determine usability of sample.
Has the ability to produce calculated results.
Has automatic rerun capability.
Has automatic dilution for overrange samples.
Performs an automatic dilution on urine patient and urine QC samples.
Has capability to process user-defined methods.
Has the ability to automatically remove reagent cartridges when these
cartridges are empty or their on-board life has expired.
Provides for automatic calibration acceptance, and storage and retrieval
of calibration results.
Provides for off-instrument storage (diskette) of test results and calibration and QC records.
Provides for barcoded QC panel processing.
1-4
2006/12
Introducing
Major Components
1
10
11
12
29
13
28
27
26
14
15
25
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
24
23
22
21
Touchscreen monitor
IMT peristaltic pump
QuikLYTE sensor holder
Monopump
IMT probe
HM reaction vessel feeder
Segmented sample area
Photometric sample probe
HM incubate and wash wheels
HM wash probes
20
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
19
18
17
16
R1 reagent arm
R2 reagent arm
Reagent cartridge tray
Cuvette manufacturing area
Cuvette waste container
HM vessel waste container
Cuvette film cartridge
Sample, reagent, HM pumps
HM probe cleaner pumps
Automatic Flex loader
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
CB020619--03
The optional hand-held barcode reader (not shown) is located to the left of the keyboard.
2006/12
1-5
Introducing
Vessel mixer #2
Vessel mixer #1
Wash wheel
Incubate wheel
Thermal ring (inside incubate wheel)
Vessel gate solenoid
Vessel shuttle
Vessel shuttle guide solenoid
1
2
5
6
16
15
8
14
13
12
1-6
11
10
Max200209_106
2006/12
Introducing
Safety
Disclaimer
The user shall be made aware
that, if the equipment is used
in a manner not specified by
the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
General Safety
Personnel operating the instrument must be proficient in its operation, maintenance, and alignment procedures. To ensure safety, follow basic precautions.
Observe all warnings and cautions in the manual.
Remove safety guards only if specifically instructed in the procedures.
Replace all guards after completing the procedures.
Stow cables and tubing properly to eliminate tripping hazards.
Use only specified cleaners on the Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system. Using other than the specified cleaners will cause imprecision in some methods.
Review the Flex reagent cartridge method insert sheets for specific
chemicals and safety information about the reagents in each method
cartridge.
WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference, in which case, the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
2006/12
1-7
Introducing
Safety Notes
Warnings and cautions are included throughout this manual to emphasize
important and critical instructions. Where appropriate, an icon is also provided as part of the warning block to visually indicate the concern of the
warning.
WARNING: An operating procedure, step, or practice that, if not followed
correctly, could result in personal injury, affect the operators
health, contaminate the environment, or cause erroneous and
misleading results.
Safety Labels
The following labels are affixed to the instrument to alert you to safety
considerations.
Attention
When used alone, the attention label indicates specific instruction affecting safety in this guide involving the marked
areas of the instrument.
When used with another symbol, the attention label points out
another instrument warning label defined in this guide. You
should understand that warning before going into the labeled
area of the instrument.
Potential Biohazard
Indicates an area of the instrument that could have been in
contact with biohazardous materials. Do not handle the
contents or touch the area unless you are properly protected.
Refer to your applicable laboratory procedures and to the
guidelines set forth by the Department Of Labor (OSHA)
29CFR Part 1910.1030, Occupational Exposure to Blood
Borne Pathogens: Final Rule.
Pinch Hazard
1-8
2006/12
Introducing
Burn Hazard
Open Lid
Crush Hazard
Link Symbol
CAUTION
Laser Radiation
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
CLASS II LASER PRODUCT
2006/12
P/N1000032468 Rev.A
Laser Label
1-9
Introducing
Emergency
The entire instrument. An emergency shutdown requires two steps: turning off
the UPS power switch and removing the instrument power cord from the wall
outlet. These two steps can be performed in any order.
Controlled
Safety
WARNING: If the UPS OFF button is not pressed, full power will still be
provided to the instrument by a fully charged UPS for approximately 21 minutes, even if the instrument power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
1-10
2006/12
Introducing
2006/12
OFF Button
1-11
Introducing
1-12
2006/12
2006/12
Introducing
1-13
Introducing
1-14
2006/12
Introducing
5 Turn off the UPS by pressing its OFF button. When the UPS power is off,
all LEDs on the UPS will go out.
WARNING: If the UPS OFF button is not pressed, full power will still be
provided to the instrument by a fully charged UPS for approximately 21 minutes, even if the instrument power cord is
unplugged from the wall.
ON/Test Button
OFF Button
2006/12
1-15
Introducing
Action Keys
Test Keys
Function Keys
Keyboard Keys
Keypad Keys
Cursor Movement
Keys
240883A-003C
Overview
The Dimension RxL Max system keyboard has six areas:
Test keys
Action keys
Function keys
Keypad keys
Cursor movement keys
Keyboard keys
The use of the keys in each area is described on the following pages.
Some of these keys can be used in combination. These are referred to as
keystroke combinations, which are also described on the following pages.
1-16
2006/12
Introducing
Test Keys
240883A-005C
Use the test keys to select tests and panels of tests. The test keys that contain
labels P1 through P10 are the panel keys. By programming groups of frequently used tests to these ten panel keys, you can request a panel of up to 20
tests with a single keystroke. (See Panel Keys in Module 6: Customizing.)
You can also customize which tests are on a test key. (See Test Keys in
Module 6: Customizing.)
UCFP
ACP
ALB
Press Control and the Test Key to select the UCFP test
Press Shift and the Test Key to select the ACP test
Press the Test Key to select the ALB test
Test Key
Keyboard Overlays
Additional tests may be shown on overlays at the top or the bottom of the
keyboard. To select these tests, press the Alt key and the key inidcated by the
overlay. For example, the TSH test is on an overlay above the test keys:
TSH
Press Alt and the Test Key to select the TSH test
UCFP
ACP
ALB
Test Key
2006/12
1-17
Introducing
Action Keys
240883A-004C
Key
Use
Stop
The Stop key can be used only with the Control key. This key combination
will stop all instrument operations in progress in a manner that will not damage
the instrument. All tests in progress will be aborted; however, all scheduled
tests will be retained in instrument memory.
To resume operations, press the Reset key.
Pause
This key turns all the sampler systems off. It prevents the photometric sample
arm and the IMT sample arm from moving. Press the Pause key again to
restart the sampler systems.
Reset
This key is used to clear error messages on the screen. It initializes any
modules that are not being used and causes the instrument to resume
processing. This key is also used to resume operations after you use the
Control/Stop key combination to halt processing.
Run
This key instructs the instrument to look for and process any new samples. It is
equivalent to the F4: Run key on the Load List screen.
Function Keys
240883A-008C
The Function keys, labeled F1F8, can be used as alternative to the touch
keys on the touchscreen. Function keys perform various tasks, depending on
which screen is displayed. The tasks are defined in the touch keys at the
bottom of the screen. The use of these function keys is self-explanatory or is
explained where needed in applicable procedures.
1-18
2006/12
Introducing
Keypad Keys
240883A-009C
Key
Use
Delete
When entering information in a field, hold down the Shift key and press Delete to
delete all characters to the right of the cursor in a field.
Exit
Press the Exit key to leave the screen that is currently on the display; the system
will return to the previous screen.
Help
Press the Help key at any time to get information about the screen that is on the
display or the functions of various keys on the keyboard that are used with that
screen. Use the PgUp and PgDn keys to move through the help screen information. Press the Exit key to return to the instrument screen. The operation of the Help
key in combination with other keys is explained
in Help Keys in the Appendix.
Alarm Off
When there is a problem with the system, the system sounds an alarm. Press the
Alarm Off key to turn off this alarm. Once the alarm has been turned off, you must
press Alarm Off again to enable the alarm.
PgUp
PgDn
Enter
Press the Enter key after entering data using the keyboard keys to store what you
entered in the current field or to activate a command.
Numbers
Use to enter numerical data. Numerical data can also be entered using the
Keyboard keys.
240883A-007C
These keys, commonly referred to as arrow keys, move the cursor on the
screen up, down, right, and left.
The left and right arrow keys move the cursor from data field to data field on
the display. When these keys are pressed with the Shift key, the cursor moves
one space to the right or left within that data field.
2006/12
1-19
Introducing
Keyboard Keys
240883A-006C
The keyboard keys function like keys on a standard computer keyboard. Keys
that have special functions when used in a data field are described below.
Key
Use
Backspace
To delete the character immediately to the left of the cursor when entering/editing
data in a field.
Enter
Tab
Use the backward slash key to delete the entire entry in a data field if you return to a
field to make corrections.
Alt
This key is used in combination with other keys to move directly to other screens or
to do other routine functions such as advance the printer paper. See Keystroke
Combinations in the Appendix for a listing of all the key combinations and what
they do.
1-20
2006/12
Introducing
Help
Run
Home
Alert
Keys
Applications Area
Enter
Exit
Arrow Keys
Message Area
Function Keys
Max200209_120
The Dimension RxL Max system display has several distinct areas in
which a specific type of information always appears. These areas are:
Instrument Status
Segment Status
Operating Conditions Status
Error Message
Applications
Message
Function Keys
Alert Keys
This section describes these areas and the information they provide.
2006/12
1-21
Introducing
1
Processing
2
Photometric
Sampler
3
IMT System
4
Not Used
5
Date and Time
Meaning
Standby
Initializing
The system is starting up. You cannot process sample or access the
sample wheel until the system has finished initializing. The sampler/
wheel will move during initialization.
Processing
System Prep
Cant Process
Diagnostics
1-22
Status
Meaning
Sampler Idle
Sampler Busy
Waiting...
The Pause key was pressed while samples were processing. The
system is waiting for an appropriate place and time to stop the
photometric and IMT sampler systems.
Waiting...60
The instrument is 60 seconds from pausing. This will count down the
number of seconds until the instrument is paused (Waiting...59,
Waiting...58, etc.).
Samplers Off
Appears when the Pause key has been pressed. The system has
stopped the photometric and IMT sampler systems. These systems
will not move until the Pause key is pressed again.
Moving Wheel...
2006/12
Introducing
Na, K, Cl colors...
The background color
indicates
the status of the IMT method.
Green = calibrated
Yellow = operator has elected
to override that IMT
method
Red = not calibrated
For information on overriding
IMT methods, see Calibrating the IMT System, in
Module 2: Using.
Status
Meaning
IMT OK
IMT Paused
All activity in the IMT system has been paused. The IMT system will
not move, prime, or calibrate unless the operator exits the screen or
presses a function key on the screen.
IMT Calibrating
Na, K, Cl
The IMT system is not calibrated. You cannot process any IMT tests
until the IMT system is calibrated.
The IMT system has not been configured. You cannot process IMT
tests.
Meaning
When Flashing
Remote Access
RFG
COLD
CVT
COLD
CHECK
NEEDS
300
LINE
OFF
240883B-132a
2006/12
1-23
Introducing
A C E H G
240883B-131
Segment Box
Meaning
A segment box with a letter in it indicates that the instrument has
scanned the sample wheel and identified that lettered segment in
that segment position. In the segment box at the left, segment
position one has the A segment in it.
1-24
2006/12
Introducing
Applications Area
Below the error message area is the applications area, the area of the screen
where you enter and review data.
The title of the screen always appears in capital letters on the first line. Below
the title are various text and data fields.
Message Area
Below the applications area on the screen is the message area. This area can
contain the following kinds of messages:
Message Type
Meaning
Prompt
Question
Information
Function Keys
F1:
F2:
F5:
F6:
F3:
F4:
F7:
F8:
The eight function keys are displayed at the bottom of the screen. The text in
the box describes the task pressing the key will perform. You can activate a
task by pressing the key on the screen or by pressing the corresponding key
(F1 through F8) on the keyboard.
Use of these keys is explained in applicable procedures. For example, if you
display Operating Menu screen and want to enter sample data, you would
press the F1 function key, which corresponds to the F1: Enter Data box on
the Operating Menu screen.
The text in function key boxes changes for each displayed screen.
2006/12
1-25
Introducing
Alert Keys
Five alert keys are displayed vertically on the left side of the screen. These
keys are normally gray but change color to alert you of a situation needing
your attention. Press the key to find out the reason for the alert.
Key
Purpose
STAT Status
Displays the STAT Samples screen. Shows the STAT requests that
are in process and the time until the result will be available, as well
as completed STATs and STATs requested but not yet begun.
Sample Alert
Supplies
QC Alert
Calib Alert
1-26
Key
Purpose
Help
Shows instructions about the screen/fields displayed in the Applications Area. It is equivalent to the Help key on the keyboard.
Run
When you press this key, the instrument looks for and processes
new samples. It is equivalent to the Run key on the keyboard or the
F4: Run key on the Load List screen.
Home
Enter
Exit
Arrow Keys
Move the cursor from field to field on the screen displayed in the
Applications Area. They are equivalent to the arrow keys on the
keyboard.
2006/12
Introducing
Installation Specifications
The Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system will be installed by a
qualified Dade Behring Inc. representative. The installation of the system will
include a full checkout to ensure that the equipment is fully operational.
Space Requirements
Dimensions, in. (cm.)
h2
d3
l1
RxL Max
805 (366)
62.5 (159)
67 (170)
32 (81)
880 (400)
62.5 (159)
67 (170)
32 (81)
1205 (548)
88.5 (225)
67 (170)
32 (81)
Instrument
Add 7.7 (20) to the length if the UPS is positioned to the left of the instrument.
Required for raising instrument lids.
3
Add 11 (28) to the depth if the UPS is positioned in the rear of the instrument.
The instrument keyboard can be raised to reduce the depth from 32 to 30.5 inches for moving the
instrument through doorways.
2
Overhead
Left Side
Right Side
Rear
19 (48)
16 (41)
3 (8)
9 (23)
19 (48)
16 (41)
3 (8)
9 (23)
19 (48)
16 (41)
2 (5)
9 (23)
RxL Max
28 in.
(71 cm)
24 in.
(61 cm)
RMS
67 in.
(170 cm)
Maximum Height
with Lid Raised
68 in.
(173 cm)
Maximum
Height
52.5 in.
(133 cm)
64 in.
(163 cm)
Maximum Height
with RMS Lid
Raised
44 in.
(112 cm)
2 in.
(5 cm)
Side
9 in.
(23 cm)
Back
26 in.
(66 cm)
UPS
62.5 in.
(159 cm)
32 in.
(81 cm)
CB020619-04
7.7 in.
(20 cm)
2006/12
1-27
Introducing
Power Requirements
Instrument Power Specifications
Normal
Line
Voltage
Voltage
Range
RxL Max
(HM or non-HM)
115V
230V
RxL Maxw/RMS
(HM or non-HM)
115V
230V
Instrument
Nominal
Maximum
Line
Continuous
Frequency
Current
Maximum
Power
103 to 127V
207 to 253V
47 to 63 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
~ 13A
~ 8A
1900 Watts
1900 Watts
103 to 127V
207 to 253V
47 to 63 Hz
47 to 63 Hz
~ 17A
~ 11A
2350 Watts
2350 Watts
The following items are common to all Dimension RxL Max instruments:
Service
Transient Overvoltage
Shield
Not required.
Wire Size
Receptacle
Hospital grade receptacle must be installed by the hospital electrician. The receptacle must be accessible to the 9 foot (2.74 meter)
power cord furnished with the instrument.
Leakage Current
Supply Voltage and Frequency
115VAC/60 Hz
230VAC/50 Hz
Under 10 A
Under 100 A
Ground Disconnected
Under 70 A
Under 150 A
Leakage current complies with the requirements of: CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1B/UL61010A-1,
and TUVPS Certification for EN61010-1 safety standards for laboratory equipment in
non-patient vicinity areas.
1-28
2006/12
Introducing
Water Requirements
The Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system requires an external
source of CLSI Clinical Laboratory Reagent Water.1 The system that provides this deionized water must be connected to the water inlet connector in
the rear of the instrument. Maximum rate of water consumption and maximum rate of liquid waste output is 0.85 gal. (3.2 L)/hr.
The purified water supply systems for the Dimension RxL Max system
must produce water to the specifications shown below. These specifications
meet the definition of CLSI Clinical Laboratory Reagent Water. Water
supply maximum valve pressure is <55 psi.
Parameter
Units
Specification
megohm-cm, 25C
10
< 10
Organic Impurities
ng/gas
< 500
Particulate Content
< 0.22
ppm
5 to 8
Ionic Purity
Microbiological Impurities
Dissolved Oxygen
2006/12
1-29
Introducing
1-30
2006/12
Using
2006/12
2-1
Using
2-2
2006/12
Using
Sample Setup
Sample Preparation
Whichever type of sample container you use, ensure that the sample quality is
acceptable for processing before you load it into a segment. The sample
should be free of clots, fibrin strands, and other impurities that may affect
metering fluids through the instrument. There should be no air bubbles in the
sample container.
While the Dimension HIL feature can alert you to undesirable hemolysis,
icterus, and lipemia in a serum or plasma sample, proper preparation is very
important. Be sure to follow the sample container manufacturers instructions
and specifications on proper tube storage and handling techniques for mixing,
timing, and centrifugation.
Types of Containers
You may use the following types of sample containers on the Dimension
RxL Max clinical chemistry system:
sample cup with lid
small sample container (SSC) supplied by Dade Behring Inc.
unstoppered 5-mL, 7-mL, and 10-mL primary sample tube
pediatric tubes of various sizes and capacities
All sample containers, except the 10-mL primary sample tube, require an
adapter to load them into the sample wheel segments.
When loading a 5-mL or 7-mL primary sample tube, use only the adapters
that were shipped with the Dimension RxL Max system. Dimension
adapters are easy to recognize: the 5-mL adapter is teal (blue-green); the
7-mL adapter is beige.
There are three colors of segments (black, yellow, and orange) available from
Dade Behring Inc. for use in loading sample containers onto the sample
wheel. All of these segments are identical except for their color. You may
find it useful to use the yellow and orange colored segments to:
designate SSC segments
differentiate sample cup and tube segments
identify STAT segments
identify segments with calibrators and verifiers
identify instruments by segment colors (in multi-instrument laboratories)
separate work from satellite or other labs
Additional orange and yellow segments can be ordered in packages of three.
2006/12
2-3
Using
WARNING: You must ensure that, prior to processing a sample cup, sufficient
sample is present in the cup to allow for any possible automatic
rerun of tests from that cup. If any of the following instrument
options is turned on,
autorerun
autodilute
automatic reflex
automatic panic rerun
HIL feature
insufficient sample in a sample cup could cause incorrect results.
Sample cups must be placed into an adapter supplied by Dade Behring Inc.
to load them into a segment. Push the sample cup completely down onto the
adapter.
Adapter with
sample cup
Teal
5-mL Adapter
Beige
7-mL Adapter
Max200209_204
2-4
2006/12
Using
Adapter*
Size
13.0 mm
75.0 mm*
5-mL
13.0 mm
100.0 mm*
7-mL
16.0 mm
100.0 mm
none
* requires a Dade Behring Inc. adapter
2006/12
Adapter
Color
(green/teal)
(beige)
2-5
Using
2-6
2006/12
Using
SSC Placed
Properly in Tube
1 mL
0617-05
Bar Coded
Draw Tube
P200717-81
2006/12
2-7
Using
Place the SSC on a sample tube that presents the SSC at the same height
used in the sample probe maximum depth alignment for SSCs. Tubes that
present the SSC at a lower position may be used, but the SSC must be
filled with 1.0 mL of sample. It is the operator's responsibility to ensure
that sufficient sample is present for the requested tests.
To process WHOLE BLOOD samples from SSCs:
Before pipetting whole blood into the SSC, ensure that the sample is
well-mixed as described in the appropriate method insert sheet.
Pipette the volume of whole blood specified for the sample cup (see the
appropriate method insert sheet) into the SSC.
WARNING: Due to whole blood mixing requirements in the SSC, do not
place more or less than the specified volume of sample in the
SSC.
Place the SSC on a sample tube that presents the SSC at the same height
used in the sample probe maximum depth alignment for SSCs. To avoid
the potential for erroneous results, tubes that present the SSC at a lower
position must not be used for whole blood samples.
2-8
2006/12
Using
0.70 in.
(18 mm)
0617-05
All Tubes
02.75 in.
(070 mm)
7 or 10-mL Tube
3.46 in.
(88 mm)
0617-05
5-mL Tube
2.75 in.
(70 mm)
240883B-93
2006/12
2-9
Using
SUFFICIENT
SAMPLE HEIGHT
100
MM
75
MM
SAMPLE
OUT OF
REACH
USE
SPACER
2-10
2006/12
Using
OPERATING MENU
Mode:
Priority: ROUTINE
Fluid:
Location: Rm101
Tests: GLU LYTES
Dilution:
SAMPLE CUP
SERUM
Volume: 48
uL
1 Using the Enter Sample Data screen, enter information in the following
operator-assigned fields.
2006/12
Field
Enter
Position
Patient Name
(and/or Sample Number)
Patient ID
Tests
2-11
Using
Use
Mode
Priority
Fluid
Field
Explanation
Position
Mode
Fluid
2-12
2006/12
Using
Explanation
Priority
Volume
Dilution
2006/12
Location
Tests
2-13
Using
OPERATING MENU
Batch reminder!
Position:
Priority: ROUTINE
Batch ID:
F2:
1 Using the Enter Batch Sample Data screen, enter information in the
following operator-assigned fields:
PositionSegment letter and position number where you will place
the first sample of the batch.
Batch IDThe unique identification number for the batch.
Number of Samples to processThe number of samples in the batch.
TestsUse the test keys or panel keys P1P10.
2 Check the information in the following fields. If necessary, change the
information as shown below.
To change
Use
Mode
Fluid
2-14
2006/12
Using
Batch Example
Let's say you want to run a batch of 25 serum samples in sample cups. You
might decide to give this batch a Batch ID of 025AX.
You would fill in the Enter Batch Sample Data screen as described below.
It is OK to be creative
when naming batch IDs...
Here the Batch ID contains the
number of samples in the
batch. This will help this
operator remember how many
samples to check on the test
result printout.
Field
Fill in with:
Position
Enter the position where the first sample cup of this batch will be placed. The
instrument will then automatically assign all of the remaining 24 samples in the
batch to available empty segment
positions on the segment wheel.
Batch ID
Mode
Press F6: Next Mode until this field displays Sample Cup.
Sample Fluid
Tests
Enter the tests using the test method keys and/or any panel keys.
OPERATING MENU
Priority: ROUTINE
Batch ID:
Batch reminder!
All batch samples are run
with a Routine priority.
F2:
2006/12
Press F1: Assign Pos to assign positions for all 25 samples in the batch.
Press F3: Load List and use the Load List screen to:
load the samples in their assigned segment positions
make a handwritten list that identifies which patient sample is in which
segment position. This list will allow you to match each patient sample to
the test report printout.
After loading the samples and making the handwritten list, press F4: Run or
the Run key.
The test report for this batch would show sample numbers of 025AXC09,
025AXC10, 025AXD01, etc., and results. (Note that the samples segment
position is shown by the last three characters of the sample number.) To
determine which patient corresponds to the segment position shown on the
report slip, you would use your handwritten list.
2-15
Using
Loading Samples
1 For samples without bar code labels, use the Load List screen to see the
segment position you assigned to each sample. The words New
Samples should be within the brackets in the upper right-hand corner of
the Load List screen. If they are not, press F2: Next Status.
Forgot what type of
sample container you
assigned to a segment
position?
VOLUME
REQUIRED
POSITION
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
LOAD LIST
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
F
F
F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
c
c
t
t
t
t
t
l
x
x
cup
cup
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
55
55
116
160
160
70
70
120
120
120
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
SAMPLE NO.
DIL
PATIENT NAME
John Smith
2
3
4
5
6
7
FLUID
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
F4: RUN
F5: PRINT
Ensure that any lids on sample cups are pressed down completely and that
all stoppers have been removed from sample tubes.
WARNING: Failure to remove stoppers can result in operator injury,
exposure to biohazardous samples, or damage to the instrument.
2-16
2006/12
Using
Position bar code labels so that the bar code is visible in the opening of
the segment. They can then be read by the bar code scanners.
240883B-43
Completely seat the segment in its segment position on the sample wheel.
WARNING: Incorrect results could occur if a segment is not
completely seated in its segment position.
2006/12
240883B-41
2-17
Using
Sample Processing
Processing Samples
When the sample information is available (either through the use of the Enter
Sample Data screen, a bar code on a sample tube, or downloaded from an
LIS) and segments have been loaded into the sample wheel, begin processing
by selecting the appropriate option. There are three ways to begin processing
samples:
Processing samples from Standby status
Adding samples while the system is in Processing status
Processing samples downloaded from an LIS
Select the option that is appropriate for your current workload. These three
options are discussed on the pages that follow.
Processing Samples from Standby Status
1 Ensure that all instrument lids are closed and all instrument doors and
panels are closed.
Process your samples using one of the three options shown below:
Press the Run key on the keyboard.
If you are processing a single sample from the Enter Sample Data
screen, press F2: Process Single.
Position: B1
Mode:
Priority: ROUTINE
Fluid:
Location: Rm101
Tests: GLU LYTES
Dilution:
SAMPLE CUP
SERUM
Volume: 48
uL
2-18
2006/12
Using
If you are processing a group of samples from the Load List screen,
press F4: Run.
LOAD LIST
VOLUME
REQUIRED
POSITION
* AA 12 cc
*A 3 t
*A 4 t
*A 5 t
*A 6 t
*A 7 t
*F 1 l
*F 2 x
*F 3 x
*
cup
cup
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
55
55
116
160
160
70
70
120
120
120
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
SAMPLE NO.
DIL
PATIENT NAME
John Smith
2
3
4
5
6
7
FLUID
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
F4: RUN
F5: PRINT
2006/12
Be sure that the sample data information for the sample is available to the
instrument. Sample data information is available if:
you entered it using the Enter Sample Data screen
the sample tube is bar coded and its information has been downloaded
to the instrument
the sample tube is bar coded and its information is available from an
LIS
2-19
Using
2-20
240883B-42
2006/12
Using
for bar code sample tubes when the instrument reads the bar code during
its scan of the sample segments
for non-bar code sample tubes after the operator assigns a position for
those samples
Reminder!
If your laboratory has an LIS,
the system configurations have
already been set to meet the
requirements of your laboratory during instrument
installation.
Do not change an instrument
option or configuration setting
without approval from your
laboratory supervisor.
Field
Set field to
Communications Set Up
Mode
OPERATING MENU
COMMUNICATION SET UP
Instrument ID:
Result Sequence:
DATA PORT
Screen
Field
Set field to
Sample Edit
OPERATING MENU
2006/12
2-21
Using
OPERATING MENU
SAMPLE STATUS
[ 13 samples: ENTERED ]
Search pattern:
SAMPLE NO.
PRIORITY
STATUS
03201
03201
03119
03276
03210
03212
03217
03218
03219
03233
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ENTERED
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
ROUTINE
TIME
09:00 Apr 22
09:01 Apr 22
09:05 Apr 22
08:45 Apr 22
08:50 Apr 22
08:50 Apr 22
09:10 Apr 22
09:10 Apr 22
09:10 Apr 22
09:15 Apr 22
F3: SEARCH
F7:
3
4
5
6
7
2-22
Repeat steps 25 until you have assigned positions and loaded all
asterisked (**) samples that you want to run at this time.
Press the Run key on the keyboard to begin processing.
2006/12
Using
System Needs
System needs include:
adding:
reagent cartridges
IMT consumables
IMT probe cleaner
cuvette film cartridge
aliquot wheel (non-HM instruments only)
performing:
calibration/verification on photometric methods and the IMT system
quality control
Before the system begins processing samples, it checks to see if it needs any
reagents or supplies or if any process control functions need to be performed
(calibration or quality control). However, tests that are ordered through the
automatic test ordering features of autodilute, autoreflex, and panic values
will not generate a system need and will not be processed if reagents, supplies, or control functions are required.
When you press F2: Process Single from the Enter Sample Data screen,
F4: Run from the Load List screen, or the Run key, the system will check its
needs (the yellow Needs Check icon appears) for processing the requested
tests.
If no system needs are required, the system will begin processing.
If system needs are required, the red Check Needs icon appears. You will
need to satisfy the system needs listed or choose to ignore these needs. If
you choose to ignore system needs, tests that require those needs WILL
NOT be processed. Tests will still be processed and reported if you
ignore QC needs.
The System Needs screen:
Shows which system needs must be satisfied to process all the samples on
the Load List. Samples that have no system needs will be scheduled for
processing.
Shows function keys only for those categories of supplies and procedures
that are needed.
2006/12
2-23
Using
1 CARTRIDGES
2 IMT CONSUMABLES
0 CUVETTE CARTRIDGE
CALIBRATE
1 PHOTO METHODS
1 IMT SYSTEM
START QC ON
0 LOTS
F1: REAGENTS
F2:
F6:
F8: IMT
300178A-009
2
3
2-24
Decide whether you want to fill all or just some needs. Use the table on
the next page to help you make your decisions.
To fill a specific system need, press its function key to see a list of what
is needed. Function keys only appear for those system needs that must be
filled to run the Load List. For example, in the screen above, to see which
reagent cartridge needs to be added, press F1: Reagents and follow the
appropriate procedure as indicated in the table below to fill the need.
Function Key
F1: Reagents
F2: QC
F3: Cal/Ver
To replace the cuvette film cartridge, press F3: Film Load and follow
Replacing the Cuvette Film Cartridge or to replace the IMT probe
cleaner bottle, press F6: HM Counters and follow Replacing HM
Fluids. Both procedures are in Module 3: Maintaining.
F8: IMT
Aliquot Positions
If you fill a need and other system needs are still required, the System
Needs screen will reappear and allow you to press another function key
and fill another need. If no additional system needs are required, the
system will begin processing your samples.
2006/12
Using
Occurred because:
Cartridges
Cuvette Cartridge
IMT Consumable
IMT System
An IMT calibration is
scheduled. If it fails, no
electrolyte tests are run.
QC
Photo Methods
Calibration status is
Expired for these
reagent cartridges.
OR
Calibration status is
Never Calibrated for
these reagent cartridges.
Aliquot Positions
(non-HM)
2006/12
Need
2-25
Using
Press the Alt/L key combination to the Load List screen and view a list of
the samples that do not have enough fluid to perform the requested tests.
OPERATING MENU
LOAD LIST
VOLUME
REQUIRED
POSITION
*
*
*
*
*
A
D
D
G
G
1
5
9
6
7
c
c
t
t
t
short
short
short
short
short
55
55
116
160
160
ul
ul
ul
ul
ul
SAMPLE NO.
DIL
PATIENT NAME
John Smith
81465
21345
32235
44467
51356
FLUID
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
F4: RUN
F5: PRINT
2-26
Use the appropriate procedure below for the sample container type with
the short sample. In the screen above, position G6 has a t after it,
indicating that sample is currently in a tube. Sample container letter
designations on the Load List screen are:
t = sample tube
c = sample cup
x = SSC
p = pediatric tube
l = limited cup-no level sense
Sample Container
Follow procedure:
Sample Cup
SSC
Pediatric Tube
2006/12
Using
The dead volume in a Dade Behring Inc. SSC is 50 L only in the sample
tube that was used to perform the sample probe maximum depth alignment
for an SSC. Tubes that present the SSC at a lower position may be used but
must be filled with 1.0 mL of sample.
1 Press the Pause key. When the Sampler status box turns blue, open the
sample area lid.
2 Remove the bar coded tube from its segment position and then use a
pipette to transfer the sample into an SSC.
3 Place the SSC on top of the same bar coded tube and place it in the same
segment position on the same sample segment.
WARNING: Failure to place the SSC/bar coded sample tube combination
into the same segment position as the original sample will
cause erroneous patient identification and erroneous results.
4
5
2006/12
Close the sample area lid and press the Pause key.
Using the Load List short sample screen, move the cursor to this short
sample, press F6: Change to SSC, and answer the prompt that appears
by typing a y.
2-27
Using
1
2
3
Press the Pause key. When the Sampler status box turns blue, open the
sample area lid.
Remove the sample tube from its segment position and then use a pipette
to transfer the sample into a sample cup.
Place the sample cup directly on top of the adaptor in the same segment
position on the sample segment. (If a 10-mL sample tube was in this
position, you will need to add an adaptor into this position to hold the
sample cup.
Do not place the sample cup directly on top of the 10-mL sample tube.)
WARNING: Failure to place the sample cup into the same segment
position that the sample tube was in will cause erroneous
patient identification and erroneous results.
4
5
Close the sample area lid and press the Pause key.
From the Load List short sample screen, move the cursor to this short
sample and press F8: Edit Sample to go to that samples Enter Sample
Data screen. Then press F7: Next Mode until the Mode field changes to
sample cup.
Press F2: Process Single.
1
2
3
Press the Pause key. When the Sampler status box turns blue, open the
sample area lid.
Remove the sample tube from its segment position and then use a pipette
to transfer the sample into a sample cup.
Place the sample cup directly on top of the adaptor in the same segment
position on the sample segment. (If a 10-mL sample tube was in this
position, you will need to add an adaptor into this position to hold the
sample cup.
Do not place the sample cup directly on top of the 10-mL sample tube.)
WARNING: Failure to place the sample cup into the same segment
position that the sample tube was in will cause erroneous
patient identification and erroneous results.
4
5
2-28
Close the sample area lid and press the Pause key.
From the Load List short sample screen, move the cursor to this short
sample and press F8: Edit Sample to go to that samples Enter Sample
Data screen. Then press F7: Next Mode until the Mode field changes to
sample cup.
Press F2: Process Single.
2006/12
Using
2006/12
The operator must determine that some sample remains in the sample cup
after the sample is run.
1 From the Load List short sample screen, move the cursor to this short
sample, press F7: No Level / Cup, and answer the prompt that appears
by typing a y.
2 After this sample has been run, there must be some sample fluid remaining in the sample cup. If the sample cup is empty, the test results should
be reviewed for possible erroneous results.
WARNING: If there is no sample in the sample cup AFTER processing is
complete, the operator must carefully review test results and
decide which are reportable. To do this, determine which tests
were sampled first. Results for tests that were sampled (and
therefore processed) first are more likely to be reportable;
however, at the point where there was no sample fluid in the
sample cup, the results reflect values based on no sample
fluid and should not be reported. Determine at which test that
occurred and do not report any results for that test or for tests
sampled/processed after that test. There may or may not be a
test report message associated with an erroneous result.
2-29
Using
Sample Status
Determining the Status of Samples
The Sample Status program enables you to check the progress of samples
through the instrument. There are several ways to determine the status of
your samples and their segments:
Sample Status screen
STAT Status alert key
Sample Alert key
Segment Status On Board Segments screen
Segment Status All Segments screen
Viewing Sample Status
More than one page of
samples?
Since this screen can contain up to 500 samples, a search function (see
Searching for a Sample later in this module) is available from this screen to
help you to find specific samples quickly.
Press F2: SAMPLE STATUS
OPERATING MENU
SAMPLE STATUS
1
2
3
4
[ 4 samples: DONE
Search pattern:
Farnsworth, Fred
Jones, Susan L.
Smith, John J.
XYZ QC 1
SAMPLE NO.
123-45-6789
PRIORITY
STATUS
ROUTINE
STAT
ROUTINE
QC
DONE
DONE
DONE
DONE
TIME
13:50
13:41
13:40
13:40
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
3
3
3
3
2-30
F3: SEARCH
F7:
From the Sample Status screen, check that the sample status category you
want to view appears in the brackets in the upper right-hand corner of the
screen. If this is not the status category you want to view, press F2: Next
Status until the status category you want appears.
2006/12
Using
Status
Meaning
Entered
This samples data has been entered into a Load List, but you have not requested
the system to run this sample yet. This samples data can still be edited before
processing.
Ready
This samples data has been entered into a Load List, the sample has been loaded
into the sample area, and you have requested the system to run this sample. This
samples data can still be edited before processing.
Begun
The system has begun to process tests for the sample; some test results may be
available. You can see any completed tests by moving the cursor to the sample and
pressing F8: Test Results. Additional tests can be added to this sample even
though processing has already begun.
Done
All tests for the sample have been processed; all test results are available. You can
see these results by moving the cursor to the samples and pressing F8: Test
Results. This sample can be edited and rerun.
Printed
All tests for the sample have been processed; all test results have been sent to the
printer. This sample can be edited and rerun.
Report
All tests for the sample have been processed; all test results have been sent to an
external host computer. This sample can be edited and rerun.
All
STAT SAMPLES
Patient Name
Sample ID
Position
Samp Available In
James Smith
A Harris
Fran Day
02030405
21232529
22332288
A2
A1
A3
NOW
24 minutes
Not Started
F2: EDIT/RERUN
F6:
F7:
2006/12
Status of Sample
Processing is completed
Now
Currently processing
Time to completion
2-31
Using
There are four display modes for the STAT Samples screen, depending on
your configuration (see STAT Sample Alert Setup in Module 6: Customizing). To change the display, press F3: Next Display.
Mode
Displays
Show All
Show Completed
Show Processing
Additional function keys on the STAT Samples screen can save time by
directly displaying screens to help you research and resolve errors. To use the
following function keys, you must first move the cursor to an individual
sample.
2-32
Function Key
Purpose
F2: Edit/Rerun
Displays the Enter Sample Data screen. For more information, see
"Editing and Rerunning a Sample" later in this section.
Removes the alert status from the selected sample. A better way to
remove the alert is to resolve the problem that caused the alert
status.
2006/12
Using
autodilute
reflex test
panic repeat
process error
Press the Sample Alert key to display the Sample Alert screen:
SAMPLE ALERT
Patient Name
---------------------------Ainsley, Keith
Sanders, Jose
Inskip, Mary
Sample ID
----------------02030403
43548901
22332222
Pos
----C1
C3
C4
Reason for
Rerunning
----------------Auto Dilute
Panic Repeat
Reflex
Meth
------ALB
GLU
BUN
Samp Available In
-----------------------2 mins 11 secs
4 mins 21 secs
READY
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200209_2-31
Samples appear on the screen at the time the initial test is completed and are
removed after the rerun is completed. The display is refreshed every
10 seconds.
While the sample is displayed, you can select it with the cursor and press
F1: Test Results to see the detail (see "Displaying Test Results" later in this
section).
2006/12
Field
Information
Patient Name
Sample ID
Position
Possibilities are:
- Auto Dilute
- Reflex
- Panic Repeat
- Process Error
Meth
The test method that is being rerun or reflexed for the sample.
Samp Available In
2-33
Using
The On Board Segments screen shows each segment position and the sample
ID of the sample that is assigned to that position. The segment ID uses the
information in the sample number field from the samples Enter Sample Data
screen.
Segment Status All Segments
You can view the processing status of segment positions for all segments at
any time by pressing the Alt/S key combination and then pressing F1: See
All.
4355476
4355477
4355478
12
13
14
15
Segment - F
123467
433167
578313
NO DATA
Segment -
103146
071870
081645
041895
361437
361763
361437
361763
10
F2:
F5:
F6:
2-34
2006/12
Using
Using the Segment Status - All Segments screen shown below, you can view
the processing status of segment positions for all segments. From the Segment Status - On Board Segments screen above, press F1: See All to see this
screen.
Heres a way to put the
All Segments screen to
use...
Use it when pre-entering
samples into segments that
are not currently on the
instrument and when you dont
remember the availability of
the segment positions.
P
P
P
P
B
B
B
8P
9P
B
B
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P E P
P E P
P E P
E
E
E
E
E
E
10 E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
r
r
r
r
r
r
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Q R S T
U V W X
Y Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
10
10
F2:
F5:
F6:
2006/12
2-35
Using
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Now press Exit to go back to the Process Control Menu screen. The
status of the slots in the incubate wheel is now shown whenever this
screen appears.
OPERATING MENU
Vessel
10
20
30
40
Status : 123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345
UUUUUPPPPP UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU
Estimated Process Time :
F1: CALIBRATION
F2: CORRELATION
F3: QC STATUS
F4: QC RANGES
The letters indicate the status of the 45 positions on the incubate wheel.
2-36
Letter
Meaning
Explanation
U
L
A
i
w
W
P
Unloaded
Loaded
Allocated
incubating
washing
Washed
Processed
Using
The dot on the screen above status position 1 and the line above position 23
correspond to the white alignment dot and the white alignment mark on the
incubate wheel itself. If there is a vessel listed on this screen that you need to
locate, use these two known reference points and refer to the illustration
below. Position/slot 1 is always the first slot counterclockwise from the white
alignment dot; all other positions/slots are numbered clockwise starting from
position/slot 1.
Position/Slot
23
24
White Alignment
Mark
White Alignment
Dot
2006/12
1
Position/Slot
45
2-37
Using
A test result line on the test report can only display one test report message. If
more than one test report message has affected the result, the instrument
prints the highest priority message. See Test Report Message Priorities in
the Appendix.
Test Results with Reference Range Indicators
A test result may contain a reference range indicator next to the result. There
are four reference range indicators: HI, LO, hp, and lp. Test results that
appear with only a reference range indicator are reportable.
WARNING: Do not report a test result that appears on the printed test report
with a reference range indicator if it also appears with a test report
message whose meaning indicates that it is NON-REPORTABLE.
When the HIL feature has been programmed (see Module 6: Customizing),
the instrument automatically pipets 20 L of sample into an empty cuvette
along with system water. Spectral absorbance measurements are used to
generate a sample-specific HIL index. The HIL index appears on the report
slip as a three-digit value where:
1st digit = H index
2nd digit = I index
3rd digit = L index
2-38
2006/12
Using
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
H
Hemoglobin (mg/dL)
H 25
25 < H 50
50 < H 200
200 < H 300
300 < H 500
500 < H 1000
I
Bilirubin (mg/dL)
I2
2<I5
5 < I 20
20 < I 40
40 < I 60
60 < I 80
L
Intralipid (mg/dL)
L 25
25 < L 50
50 < L 200
200 < L 600
600 < L 1000
1000 < L 3000
If the following conditions are met, the test report will display the HIL
interf message next to the affected test result:
the HIL Operating Mode has been set to an AUTO-ON mode
a method with entered Alert Index values between 2 and 6 has been
processed on the sample
any of the measured HIL index values (H, I or L) is greater than or equal
to the corresponding Alert Index value entered for that method
If the HIL Interf message is displayed, follow your laboratorys procedure
for reporting results when the sample is hemolyzed, icteric and/or lipemic.
If the maximum number of tests (36) has been ordered for a sample, HIL is
not processed.
2006/12
2-39
Using
CV =
(x X)
N 1
SD
x 100
X
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+
+
Austin Memorial Hospital
+
+
04/13/2002 15:05
+
+
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+
+
TEST REPORT
+
+
+
+
Jason, Donna
+
+ Patient:
+
+ Sample No: 28740
Location:
RM 304
+
+
Sample:
Plasma
+
+ Priority:
Routine
+
+ Entered:
15:00 Apr 13
+
+
1
+
+ Position:
Segment:
A
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
TEST
RESULT
REF. INTERVAL
UNITS
+
+
Ind
234
HIL
+
+
mg/dL
9.7
CA
8.8 - 10.5
+
+
mg/dL
9.7
CA
8.8 - 10.5
mg/dL
1.0
crea
0.6 - 1.3
+
+
mg/dL
21.4 HI
MG
assay range
+
+
mg/dL
VANC
above asy rng
+
+
cv:
0.54
mean: 9.7
CA
sd: 0.071
+
+
+
+
+
+
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Max200209_35
The header of the instrument printers test report can be customized with your
laboratory's name. (See Configuring the Printer in Module 6: Customizing).
2-40
2006/12
Using
Test Report
Patient information
Comes from the Enter Sample Data screen (or the LIS).
Test Results
HIL
CA
This indicates that two CA tests were requested and run on this
sample.
crea
MG
VANC
The result was above the assay range of the method and could not
be calculated. No result is reported with the above assy rnge nonreportable test report message.
CA
See Test Report Messages and Reference Range Indicators in the Appendix
for an alphabetical listing of all the test report messages, their meaning, and
what action should be taken by the operator when they appear.
2006/12
2-41
Using
OPERATING MENU
Reminder:
This display is instantly
updated with results as tests
are completed.
TEST RESULTS
Patient Name:
Sample No.:
Location:
TEST
RESULT
Status:
Entered:
Dilution:
Priority:
Fluid:
TEST STATUS
LOT
REF. INTERVAL
UNITS
To set up a customized
order for viewing and
printing test results...
See Test Result Order in
Module 6: Customizing.
F3: POSITION
F6: SEARCH
From the Test Results screen, type the patient name or sample number
and press Enter. The most recently processed sample with that patient
name or sample number appears.
2 To see if there are any more samples with test results for the same patient
name or sample number, press F1: Search Back to search chronologically for a sample processed prior to this sample or F2: Search Forward
to search for one processed after this sample.
You can view/print the results out in either the order in which they were
processed (referred to as sampled order) or in your customized order
(referred to as selected order) if you have one set up. Press F7: Smp Ord On/
Off and answer the prompt to see the difference between a sample order
sequence and a processed order sequence for these test results. Note that
whichever order you leave this screen in will be used by the instrument for all
future reporting; typically the order is not changed after it is set up during
your instrument installation.
Reprinting Results from the Test Results Screen
You can reprint these results by pressing F5: Print Results.
2-42
If these results have already been sent to a host computer, the message Do
you want to re-transmit to Host Computer (y/n) appears. Before using the
retransmit feature, ensure that the host computer is capable of receiving
multiple reports for the same sample without confusing them. If you are not
sure, check with your local host computer consultant.
Press n to print out the results; press y to retransmit to your host computer.
2006/12
Using
OPERATING MENU
SAMPLE STATUS
1
2
3
4
[ 4 samples: DONE
Search pattern:
Farnsworth, Fred
Jones, Susan L.
Smith, John J.
XYZ QC 1
SAMPLE NO.
123-45-6789
PRIORITY
STATUS
ROUTINE
STAT
ROUTINE
QC
DONE
DONE
DONE
DONE
TIME
13:50
13:41
13:40
13:40
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
3
3
3
3
F3: SEARCH
F7:
1 Using the Sample Status screen, check that the sample status category
you want to search through is in the brackets in the upper right-hand
corner of the screen. If this is not the status category you want to search,
press F2: Next Status until the status category you want to search appears.
2 Press F3: Search.
3 Type the desired search pattern for the patient name or sample number of
the sample. You dont have to type the entire patient name or sample
number; just type enough of it to make it unique, followed or preceded by
an asterisk (*). See Search Examples on the following page for how the
asterisk is used.
4 Press the Enter key. The Test Results screen for the most recently processed sample with that search pattern will appear.
5 Press F1: Search Back to see if any more matches were found for the
search pattern you entered.
2006/12
2-43
Using
Search Examples
If you type
John Smith
Smith-Jackson
*Smith
Smith*
*Smith*
123*
123**9
Numbers that begin with 123, end with 9, and have two characters
between the 3 and 9.
It would find: 123649, 123AZ9, 123GB9, 1235W9.
2-44
2006/12
Using
Do this
Load List
If the sample is still on the Load List, move the cursor to the sample
and press F8: Edit Sample.
Sample Status
Sample Status Screen
Reminder:
1 Press F2: Next Status until the status category in the upper righthand corner of the display changes to the status category of the
sample, if known, or All.
2 Find the sample in this list by either moving the cursor to the
sample using the arrow keys or by pressing F3: Search and
entering the desired search pattern.
Test Results
A6
Mode:
PRIMARY TUBE
Priority: ROUTINE
Sample No.:
Fluid:
Location:
Tests:
Dilution:
SERUM
T4 TU
Volume:
2006/12
36 uL
This sample was already processed; the system has copied the sample data
from the previous sample with the same ID.
The Enter Sample Data screen or the Add Tests screen will appear.
Change or add any information as you do when filling out the Enter
Sample Data screen. (If the Add Tests screen appears, you can only add
tests to that sample or change its priority.)
After you have edited the information:
Press F2: Process Single or the Run key to begin processing this
sample.
Press F3: Load List to enter the sample into the Load List. Then
press F4: Run or the Run key if you want to begin processing all
samples shown in this Load List.
From the Enter Sample Data screen, you can also press F1: New Sample
to enter a new sample.
2-45
Using
ENTER DATA
LOAD LIST
POSITION
--------------
SAMPLE NO.
--------------------
DIL
--------
PATIENT NAME
----------------------------
FLUID
----------
Load errors for which segment(s) (A - Z), * on the instrument, ! for alt:
F4: RUN
2-46
5
6
Answer the message that appears to designate the segment(s) that have
samples with errors to be loaded into the Load List.
Selection
Selects
Segment letter
2006/12
Using
System Needs
Supplies Alert
When the Supplies alert key changes to yellow, press the key on the
touchscreen to display the Reagent Cartridge Alerts screen.
LOT NUMBER
ALERT AT
XX3009
XZ2299
XY3036
ZX3068
10
240
161
161
TESTS LEFT
5
240
60
100
F2:
F3:
F4: PRINT
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200209_2-41
The screen sample above demonstrates three different scenarios for a reagent
cartridge alert:
ACP - a single ACP Flex cartridge is on board and has only five tests
remaining, five fewer than the designated alert threshold of 10.
ALB - multiple ALB Flex cartridges are on board, all with the same lot
number. The Tests Left field shows the cumulative number of
tests from all ALB reagent cartridges.
CHOL - multiple CHOL Flex cartridges from two different lots are on
board. The threshold of 161 is compared to the cumulative number
of Tests Left from all CHOL reagent cartridges.
When a method appears on the Reagent Cartridge Alerts screen, you can do
one of the following:
Load enough reagent cartridges to exceed the Alert At threshold for the
method (see Adding Reagent Cartridges later in this section).
Change the Alert At threshold to a number lower than the number of
available tests (see Setting Alert Thresholds in Module 6: Customizing).
Change the Alert At threshold to 0 (zero) to disable the alert function
for the method (see Setting Alert Thresholds in Module 6: Customizing).
2006/12
2-47
Using
METHOD
Empty Slots: 79
LOT
SEQUENCE TESTS
NUMBER
NO.
LEFT
CALIB
EXP. DATE
SYSTEM
EXP. DATE
14:44 Jul 28
IN
USE
ABS
CA1079
31747
ABS
BUN
CA1079
LA0356
31236
17074
15
100
00:00 Mar 21
NO
NO
NO
CREA
KN0316
18321
16
GLU
LDH
PHOS
NA1040
XB0286
KA0314
02913
08556
03367
18
45
110
11:16 Oct 17
NO
NO
NO
YES
PTN
CA1090
02238
90
NO
09:49 Aug 17
F2:
F5: PRINT
302264S-004
A yellow NO in the
In Use field...
Indicates that automatic
removal of this reagent
cartridge was unsuccessful.
This cartridge must be
removed manually. See
Removing Reagent Cartridges later in this section.
2-48
Field
Information
Method
Lot Number
Sequence Number
Tests Left
The date after which the cartridge will not be used by the system and
must be discarded.
In Use
YES (white)
NO (white)
Function Key
How to use it
F5: Print
2006/12
Using
2006/12
240883B-26r
2-49
Using
GB0301 25131096
GB0301 = Lot number
(two letters and four numbers)
25131096 = Sequence number
(eight numbers)
Put the reagent cartridge into the automatic loader so that its narrow end
goes into the instrument first and its bar code label is on the right side of
the cartridge.
When the bar code reader fails to read the bar code this time, use the
keyboard to enter the information recorded in step 1 onto the screen.
a) Type the method name abbreviation (e.g., CREA) and then press
Enter.
b) Type the lot number (e.g., GB0301) and then press Enter.
c) Type the first five numbers of the sequence number (e.g., 25131) and
then press Enter.
d) Type the last three numbers of the sequence number (e.g., 096) and
then press Enter.
OPERATING MENU
Mode:
KEYBOARD
ETA:
Cartridge Label:
METHOD
LOT NUMBER
SEQUENCE
CREA
GB1209
25131 096
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
240883B-340
2-50
Press F1: Accept Data to confirm the addition of the reagent cartridge.
The automatic loader will then place the reagent cartridge into the instrument.
2006/12
Using
A yellow NO in the
In Use field...
Indicates that an automatic
reagent cartridge removal of
this cartridge was unsuccessful.
This cartridge must be
removed manually. See To
remove a specific reagent
cartridge on this page
METHOD
Empty Slots: 79
LOT
SEQUENCE TESTS
NUMBER
NO.
LEFT
ABS
CA1079
31747
ABS
BUN
CA1079
LA0356
31236
17074
15
100
CREA
KN0316
18321
GLU
LDH
NA1040
XB0286
02913
08556
16
18
PHOS
PTN
KA0314
CA1090
03367
02238
CALIB
EXP. DATE
SYSTEM
EXP. DATE
14:44 Jul 28
IN
USE
00:00 Mar 21
NO
NO
NO
11:16 Oct 17
09:49 Aug 17
NO
45
NO
NO
110
90
YES
NO
F2:
F5: PRINT
302264S-004
Using the Reagent Cartridge Inventory screen, decide whether you want to
remove a specific cartridge, all empty cartridges, or all reagent cartridges
from the instrument and then follow the instructions below.
WARNING: Wait until the red loader light is blinking before placing your
hands or fingers into the loader to remove a reagent cartridge.
2006/12
2-51
Using
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
REAGENT CARTRIDGE INVENTORY
REAGENT CARTRIDGE HOLD
INVENTORY
METHOD
LOT
NUMBER
SEQUENCE
NO.
GLU
PHOS
LA9355
JB9274
04234
11137
TESTS
LEFT
240
120
SYSTEM
EXP. DATE
IN
USE
13:30 Jun 26
10:24 Jun 18
NO
NO
F2:
F4:
F5: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
302263A-010
2
If you have loaded a
third lot by mistake...
To remove a third lot from the
instrument:
1 Move the cursor to the
reagent cartridge.
2 Press F3: Remove Reag.
The cartridge will be moved to
the autoloader for you to
remove.
2-52
Move the cursor to the reagent cartridge that you want to begin using on
the Dimension system and then press F1: Replace Lot.
Since this action will permanently remove a previous lot ID from instrument memory, the system will display the message: New lot would
replace calibrated lot (Lot ID that will be replaced). Do you approve?
(y/n).
Press y to confirm removal of this lots calibration from instrument
memory. If you are not ready to replace this lot (e.g., there are still
unexpired Flex reagent cartridges remaining in your laboratory for this
lot, or you loaded this third lot by mistake), press n.
2006/12
Using
Replacing HM Consumables
The HM module requires periodic replacement of the four fluids listed below
and the addition of reaction vessels:
IMT probe cleaner
chemistry wash
reagent probe cleaner
sample probe cleaner
The IMT probe cleaner must be replaced when it appears on the System
Needs screen before processing tests. It appears if its 30-day expiration
period has expired or if there is 0% left in the bottle as indicated in the Fill
Level Est field on the Heterogeneous Module System Counters screen.
The volume of chemistry wash, reagent probe cleaner, and sample probe
cleaner is monitored by a low level sensor in each of their bottles.
WARNING: DO NOT pool the Chemistry Wash solution. To prevent contamination of these solutions, wear gloves when handling the dip tube
assemblies and do not allow them to touch the instrument or the
floor.
Replace these fluids when there is less than 5% remaining in the bottle as
indicated on the Daily Maintenance Routines screen (F3: Chk HM Counts) or
when an error message appears indicating that the bottle is empty.
Replacing HM Fluids
1 With the system in Standby, go to the Heterogeneous Module System
Counters screen.
OPERATING MENU
Last Replaced
Replace
Wash Buffer :
86 %
NO
66 %
NO
83 %
NO
100 %
NO
Last Replaced
Replace
NO
Item
Vessels in Waste :
Count
Replace at
201
250
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
300178A-001
2006/12
2-53
Using
Chemistry Wash
Sample Probe Cleaner
302045A-002
2-54
2006/12
Using
Bottle
To Replace
Chemistry Wash,
Reagent Probe Cleaner
or Sample Probe Cleaner
4
5
2006/12
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor box to each bottle that was replaced and press the Enter key.
Press F1: Store Changes.
2-55
Using
2-56
2006/12
Using
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
Assays Remaining:
Std A
1401
Std B
550
Flush
1080
Salt Soln
200
Diluent
5
Sensor
800
F3:CHANGE FLUSH
F4:
Max200303_2-56
2006/12
2-57
Using
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
Assays Remaining:
Std A
1401
Std B
550
Flush
1080
Salt Soln
200
Diluent
5
Sensor
800
F3:CHANGE FLUSH
F4:
Max200303_2-56
To Replace
Diluent or
Salt Bridge Solution
Standard A,
Standard B, or
Flush
2-58
Press the appropriate function key for each fluid replaced. The screen will
update with the maximum assays and, if applicable, time left for that
fluid.
Press F8: Store Changes. After you replace fluids, the system will
automatically:
prime any fluids that were replaced.
schedule an IMT calibration if you replaced Standard A or B or when
you exit from this screen.
2006/12
Using
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
Assays Remaining:
Std B
550
Flush
1080
Salt Soln
200
Diluent
5
Sensor
800
F3:CHANGE FLUSH
F4:
Max200303_2-56
Press down on the rear of the sensor holder and pull the holder forward.
P
R
E
S
S
240883B-28
3
Samples and maximum
time on instrument for a
new QuikLYTE sensor:
Samples = 1,000
Time = 5 days
2006/12
Slide the used QuikLYTE sensor out of the holder, insert the new
QuikLYTE sensor, and close the sensor holder.
Press F7: Change Sensor. The screen will update with the maximum
assays and time for the new QuikLYTE sensor.
Press F8: Store Changes. The system will automatically prime the Salt
Bridge Solution and the IMT Condition and Dilution Check screen
appears.
(Continue with step 7 in Running a Dilution Check on the next page.)
2-59
Using
When selecting a
segment position ...
Select a segment that has
two consecutive positions
available.
ONLY
Run a dilution check as part of the replacement procedure for the
QuikLYTE sensor, the monopump valve seal and piston lip seal.
ALWAYS
Refrigerate bottles of Dilution Check solution.
Use the same bottle of Dilution Check solution when checking performance across multiple instruments.
NEVER
Run a dilution check on a sensor that has already been used to run
samples.
Use Dilution Check solution from a bottle that has less than one inch of
fluid remaining in it.
Rerun a dilution check using the same sample cup. Always pour a fresh
cup.
7 At the IMT Condition and Dilution Check screen, type the segment
position for the conditioning sample in the Start at Position field and
press Enter.
8 Press F4: Cond & Dilchk. The screen will update with assigned positions for the conditioning and dilution check fluids.
Solution / Sample
Cup Number
Conditioning Sample
Dilution Check Sol.
6
7
F2: DILCHK
F3:
F5: START
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200303_2-59
9
Pouring Dilution Check
Solution ...
Always remove the flip-top cap
before pouring. DO NOT
dispense this solution directly
from the flip- top cap. This
results in failed dilution checks
from salt buildup in the flip-top
cap.
2-60
Fill a sample cup with conditioning sample (plasma or serum) and load it
into its assigned position as shown on the screen.
10 Remove the cap from the Dilution Solution bottle and fill a sample cup
by pouring directly from the bottle. Load this sample cup into its assigned
position as shown on the screen.
11 Press F5: Start. An IMT calibration will be scheduled automatically with
the dilution check.
2006/12
Acceptable IMT
calibration slope
ranges (in mv/decade):
Na
K
Cl
53 to 65
53 to 65
40 to 55
Acceptable IMT
dilution check values:
sd: Na 1.4
K 0.04
bias: < 1 %
2006/12
Using
12 Check the printout for the IMT dilution check to see if it passed or failed.
There will be no dilution check printout if the IMT calibration fails.
If the dilution check passed, continue with step 13 below.
If the dilution check failed, follow the Resolving a Failed Dilution
Check procedure on the next page. When the dilution check does
pass, you do not need to rerun the IMT calibration.
If the IMT calibration fails, follow the IMT Troubleshooting
procedures in Module 5: Troubleshooting to resolve why the IMT
calibration failed.
13 Record the dilution check results from the printout on the Electrolyte
Results log sheet.
14 Run QC for electrolytes.
2-61
Using
136.22
3.92
0.402
0.014
140.00
4.00
2.35%
139.41
4.02
The bias is > 1%. Press F1: CORRECT BIAS to automatically correct the dilution calibration factor
which resets the bias to zero.
F1: CORRECT BIAS
F2:
F3:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200303_2-61a
Press F1: Correct Bias. At the prompt, Do you want the dilution calibration factor to be corrected? (y/n), type a y for yes.
If the Bias field corrects to 0%, record both the FAILED and the
PASSED dilution check results from their printouts on the Electrolyte
Results log sheet and then run QC for electrolytes.
If the Bias field does not correct, continue with step 3. When the bias
does not correct, a message similar to that shown on the screen below
will appear.
IMT DILUTION CALIBRATION
Current Dilution Check Results
Na
132.8
K
3.81
Na
139.6
K
4.00
132.6
132.8
3.80
3.80
139.4
139.6
3.99
3.99
132.5
132.1
3.81
3.80
139.3
138.8
4.00
3.99
139.33
4.00
mean:
132.56
3.80
sd:
Bottle:
0.288
140.00
0.005
4.00
Bias:
5.38%
F2:
F3:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200303_2-61b
2-62
2006/12
4
5
6
7
Acceptable IMT
dilution check
sd values for Na and K:
Using
sd: Na 1.4
K 0.04
2006/12
2-63
Using
mean:
sd:
Bottle:
Na
139.6
138.7
K
3.97
3.96
138.4
3.97
138.90
0.624
140.00
3.97
0.006
4.00
Bias:
0.81%
F2:
F3:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200303_2-63
1
2
3
4
2-64
Press F4: Run Dilchk to go to the IMT Condition and Dilution Check
screen.
Press F2: Dilchk and then pour fresh Dilution Check solution into a new
sample cup and place it in the assigned position indicated on the screen.
Press F5: Start.
After running the dilution check:
If the dilution check passes, record the results from the printout on the
Electrolyte Results log sheet and then run QC for electrolytes.
If the dilution check does not pass but all the results are complete,
refer to the appropriate troubleshooting steps listed earlier in this
section.
If the dilution check still does not process completely, call the Technical Assistance Center.
2006/12
Using
C2
1
1 C4
For logit methods: Conc = C3
Abs C0
2006/12
2-65
Using
The system will process samples using reagent lots that have an expired
calibration/verification status, but it will print and display a Calib Expired
processing message with the results. The system will not use a reagent lot if it
has not been calibrated/verified on the instrument or if its calibration has been
rejected by the operator.
Calibration Alert
The Calib Alert key changes color when a calibrated lot approaches or
reaches its expiration date. The threshold used (0 to 240 hours before expiration) is operator-assigned and is the same for each method. See Configuring
Calibration Alerts in Module 6: Customizing.
When the Calib Alert key is yellow, press it to display the Calibration Alert
screen:
CALIBRATION ALERT
METHOD
-----------CA
CHOL
CKMB
PBNP
LOT
-----------XX4215
XX4365
XX5215
XX4365
CAL PRODUCT
--------------------Chem 1
CHOL Cal
Field
2-66
Information
Method
Lot
2006/12
Using
From the Calibration Alert screen, you can perform several tasks by pressing
the appropriate function key:
Key
Task
1
2
Press the Calib Alert key on the touchscreen to display the Calibration
Alert screen.
Press F3: Group Cals on the Calibration Alert screen to display the
Group Cal Alerts screen.
CAL PRODUCT
--------------------TP/ALB CL
CHEM1 CAL1
CAL LOT
------------
1ST
CUP
------
CALIBRATION CUPS
L1 L2 L3 L4 L5
RUN QC
---------------------------- ------------
VOLUME
EXCEEDED
----------------NO
METHODS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------ALB TP
CREA GLUC
F3: PRINT
F7: LOAD/RUN
F8: QC YES/NO
Max7.4 Cal02
3
4
2006/12
Using
5
6
2-68
Function Key
Action
2006/12
Using
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION SET UP
METHOD:
Operator:
LOT:
Status:
Calibration Expires:
Calibrator Product/Lot:
Start at Position:
LEVELS
BOTTLE VALUE
------------- -----------------------1
2
3
4
5
SEG CUP
----------------
Calibrator/verifier
information...
Check the method insert sheet
for which calibrator/verifier
product to use.
Use the calibrator product
insert sheet for the following
information:
product name
product lot number
bottle values
2006/12
F2:
F7: LOAD/RUN
F8: QC YES/NO
Max 7.4 Cal69
1
2
Information
Lot
If this is not the correct lot number, press F1: Other Lot.
Status
The calibration status of this lot for the method. A calibration for this lot
cannot be set up if its status is Not Accepted.
Operator
Calibrator Product EQCC: Calibrator product name is automatically entered from previously
defined products.If multiple products are available, select one from the list.
Manual: Enter the calibrator product name and calibrator lot number.
Lot
2-69
Using
Start at Position
Enter the segment position where you will place the first cup. Do not use
SSC segments for calibrations.
Bottle Values
3
4
5
6
7
8
If your instrument uses the Auto Acceptance option and the calibration passes
all acceptance criteria, you may skip steps 9 through 13. If the calibration
fails the auto-acceptance limits, continue with step 9.
Continue with step 9 even if any of the informational messages listed below
appear on the report slip (or on the Calibration Review screen):
Arithmetic
above assay range
high A error especially with the UCFP method
nan nan designates not a number
assay range
9 Go to the Calibration Review screen and select the method by pressing its
test key. If the correct Lot number is not displayed, press F1: Other Lot.
Number of Replicates
per level ...
HM methods have a different
number of replicates per level
of calibrator depending on the
specific HM method calibrated.
OPERATING MENU
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION REVIEW
METHOD: BUN
LOT: HB5214
Calculation: LINEAR
Units: mg/dL
85
168
C0 0.6660
MEAN
80
154
C1 1.1650
SD
0.3
0.3
1.8
C2
RESULT 1
80
154
C3
RESULT 2
80
156
C4
RESULT 3
79
152
BOTTLE
STATISTICS: m = 0.923
b = 0.146
COEFFICIENTS
2
0
LEVELS
r = 1.000
F6: SEE QC
F7: CALCULATE
510k-379
2-70
2006/12
Using
10 Press F7: Calculate. Continue with step 11 even if the Curve Fit Not
Finalized message appears after pressing F7: Calculate.
CALIBRATION REVIEW
METHOD: BUN
Calculation: LINEAR
Units: mg/dL
1
85
168
C0 0.5634
MEAN
86
167
C1 1.2617
0.3
0.3
1.9
C2
RESULT 1
86
167
C3
RESULT 2
87
169
C4
RESULT 3
86
165
SD
STATISTICS: m = 1.000
COEFFICIENTS
BOTTLE
LEVELS
LOT: HB5214
Status: NOT ACCEPTED
b = 0.000
r = 1.000
F6: SEE QC
F7: UN-CALCULATE
510k-379
Slope (m)
Intercept (b)
0.971.03
2006/12
2-71
Using
Intercept (b)
0.951.05
1
2
3
4
5
2-72
2006/12
Using
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION HISTORY
Units: g/dL
Scalers: A:
METHOD: HA1C
LOT: XX7320
Calculation: LOGIT
CALIBRATOR: XX7320
0.00000 B: 0.00240 C:
0.63710 D:
03:27 AM
2.74240
LEVELS
BOTTLE
0.0
0.5
0.9
1.7
3.0
C0
MEAN
0.0
0.5
0.9
1.7
3.0
C1
-163.8605
0.02
0.01
0.02
0.04
0.13
C2
-2.5901
RESULT 1
0.0
0.5
0.9
1.7
3.1
C3
1.6666
RESULT 2
0.0
0.5
0.9
1.7
2.9
C4
0.5000
RESULT 3
5.8163
RESULT 4
HB BOTTLE VAL
SD
RESULT 5
109.7245
LEV3 14.480
COEFFICIENTS
m = 0.992
b = 0.007
LEV4 14.480
r = 0.999
F6: SHOW HB
Key
2006/12
Function
Presents the information in a plot format and lets you print a hard
copy.
2-73
Using
Calibration Troubleshooting
This section contains information on troubleshooting a calibration that has
unacceptable:
Precision
Calibration Statistics
Quality Control
Troubleshooting Precision of Calibration Results
Review calibrator preparation, storage conditions, and expiration date on
the package insert sheet of the calibrator product. For lyophilized products, the preparation steps must be followed precisely.
Review the instrument maintenance logs and the System Counters screen
for any maintenance that may be overdue. Check the cycle count for the
sample probe tip, especially if the problem is on a method with a low
sample volume.
Check that all temperatures are within range on the Daily Maintenance
screen. Check the temperatures with a calibrated thermometer according
to the Calibrating Cuvette System Temperature, Calibrating Reagent
System Temperature, and Calibrating HM Module Temperature
procedures in Module 3: Maintaining.
If any data points are missing due to a process error:
- For logit methods, you must reject the calibration.
- For linear methods, up to three data points can be missing as long as
there is at least one data point for each level. If the calibration meets
the criteria, it can be accepted.
Troubleshooting Calibration Statistics
Ensure that you are using the insert sheet from the correct calibrator lot
that you are calibrating.
Review calibrator preparation, storage conditions, and expiration date on
the package insert sheet of the calibrator product. For lyophilized products, the preparation steps must be followed precisely.
Check that the sample cups were loaded into the segment in the proper
order. If they were not, you must press F8: Reject Data and rerun the
calibration.
Review the instrument maintenance logs and the System Counters screen
for any maintenance that may be overdue. Check the cycle count for the
sample probe tip, especially if the problem is on a method with a low
sample volume.
Check that all temperatures are within range on the Daily Maintenance
screen. Check the temperatures with a calibrated thermometer according
to the Calibrating Cuvette System Temperature, Calibrating Reagent
System Temperature, and Calibrating HM Module Temperature
procedures in Module 3: Maintaining.
Compare the C4 term on the Calibration Review Data screen to the C4
value on the method insert sheet. If it is not the same, call the Technical
Assistance Center. Only logit methods have a C4 term.
2-74
2006/12
Using
2006/12
2-75
Using
OPERATING MENU
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION SET UP
METHOD:
Operator:
LOT:
Status:
Calibration Expires:
Calibrator Product/Lot:
Start at Position:
LEVELS
BOTTLE VALUE
------------- -----------------------1
2
3
4
5
SEG CUP
----------------
Calibrator/verifier
information...
Check the method insert sheet
for which calibrator/verifier
product to use.
Use the calibrator product
insert sheet for the following
information:
product name
product lot number
bottle values
F2:
F7: LOAD/RUN
F8: QC YES/NO
Max 7.4 Cal69
1
2
Information
Lot
If this is not the correct lot number, press F1: Other Lot.
Status
The calibration status of this lot for the method. A calibration for this lot
cannot be set up if its status is Not Accepted.
Operator
Never Calibrated
In Progress
Not Accepted
Calibrated
Expired
You cannot set up a verification for a method if its Status is
Not Accepted. Accept or
Reject the verification before
proceeding.
Calibrator Product EQCC: Calibrator product name is automatically entered from previously
defined products.If multiple products are available, select one from the list.
2-76
Manual: Enter the calibrator product name and calibrator lot number.
Calibrator Lot
Using
Start at Position
Enter the segment position where you will place the first cup. Do not use
SSC segments for calibrations.
Bottle Values
3
4
5
6
7
8
If your instrument uses the Auto Acceptance option and the verification
passes all acceptance criteria, you may skip steps 9 through 13. If the verification fails the auto-acceptance limits, continue with step 9.
Continue with step 9 even if the above assay range message appears on the
report slip (or on the Calibration Review screen):
above assay range
9 Go to the Calibration Review screen and select the method by pressing its
test key. If the correct Lot number is not displayed, press F1: Other Lot.
OPERATING MENU
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION REVIEW
METHOD: LDH
Calculation: VERIFY
Units: U/L
LEVELS
BOTTLE
MEAN
SD
RESULT 1
RESULT 2
RESULT 3
LOT: LA0014
Status: NOT ACCEPTED
COEFFICIENTS
100
300
500
C0 0.0000
97
299
486
C1 9.4000
1.0
2.1
3.8
C2
97
298
489
C3
98
297
482
C4
96
302
488
RESULT 4
RESULT 5
STATISTICS: m = 0.973
2006/12
b = 2.000
r = 1.000
F6: SEE QC
F7: CALCULATE
2-77
Using
To delete a result, move the cursor to the result and press F3: Delete
Result.
11 Review the verification statistics m, b, and r that appear on the bottom of
the screen and decide if these values are acceptable.
If the verification statistics are acceptable, press F2: Accept Data
(the Status field on the screen will change to Calibrated) and
continue with step 12.
Acceptable Criteria Method for Verifications
Slope (m)
0.901.10
Intercept (b)
0.0 or clinically insignificant
If the verification statistics are not acceptable, you must reject this
verification by pressing F8: Reject Data. Refer to Troubleshooting
Verification Statistics at the end of this procedure to resolve the
problem and then rerun the verification.
NOTE: DO NOT press F7: Calculate; the only exception is for the
CKMB method. For CKMB, if Level I is not between 3 to +3, you
must press F7: Calculate. After pressing F7: Calculate, the Level I
result should be between 3 to +3. Review your results to see if they
are now acceptable. If they are acceptable, press F2: Accept Data and
continue with step 12. If they are still unacceptable, you must press
F8: Reject Data and rerun the verification.
12 Review the QC results.
Press F6: See QC and decide if the results that appear in the message
area of the screen are within the acceptable established QC ranges.
If the QC is within acceptable range, you are finished. Remember to
save the printouts for your verification and documentation records.
If the QC is not acceptable, refer to the "Troubleshooting Quality
Control" at the end of this procedure to resolve the problem and then
rerun the QC.
2-78
2006/12
Using
Cancelling a Verification
You can cancel a verification only if it has been scheduled (F7: Assign Cups
has been pressed but you have not pressed F4: Run or the Run key). After
cancelling a calibration, the Calibration Set Up screen Status field changes to
Rejected for that lot. Since the system will not use a reagent lot that has
been rejected by the operator, you will need to recalibrate this lot.
1
2
3
4
5
Verification Troubleshooting
This section contains information on troubleshooting a verification that has
unacceptable:
Precision
Verification Statistics
Quality Control
Troubleshooting Precision of Verification Results
Review verifier preparation, storage conditions, and expiration date on
the package insert sheet of the verifier product. For lyophilized products,
the preparation steps must be followed precisely.
Review the instrument maintenance logs and the System Counters screen
for any maintenance that may be overdue. Check the cycle count for the
sample probe tip, especially if the problem is on a method with a low
sample volume.
Check that all temperatures are within range on the Daily Maintenance
screen. Check the temperatures with a calibrated thermometer according
to the Calibrating Cuvette System Temperature and Calibrating
Reagent System Temperature procedures in Module 3: Maintaining.
If any data points are missing due to a process error:
up to three data points can be missing as long as there is at least one data
point for each level. If the verification meets the criteria, it can be accepted.
2006/12
2-79
Using
2-80
2006/12
Using
OPERATING MENU
IMT CALIBRATION
Overriding IMT
method(s):
You may elect to override a
specific IMT method.
1
2
Reminder:
If you override the K method,
the Na method will also be
overridden because the K
method is required for
accurate Na results.
C0 and C1 coefficients
when URINE is selected
as the fluid type...
The following are the default
coefficients used by the
software when urine is
selected as the fluid type:
C0
C1
Na+
0
1.0
K+
0
1.0
Cl
0
1.06
2006/12
Std A
Std B
OVERRIDE
Na
55.59
41.33
12.75
NO
59.88
-14.01
30.32
NO
Cl
-49.42
8.28
25.59
NO
0.41
0.07
0.50
0.08
F1: CALIBRATE
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Electrolyte Coefficients
For the QuikLYTE system results to compare to other existing indirect
diluted electrolyte systems, the following recommended C0 and C1 terms
are the default settings in the software.
Indirect (diluted)
Na+
Recommended
C0
C1
1.5
1.01
K+
0.2
1.05
Cl-
10.0
1.09
2-81
Using
CALIBRATION
LOT
[recommended lots]
EXPIRATION
KJ5125
WC5133
MP5225
AG5175
DT5290
FG5165
GB5225
RT5340
SJ5285
LY5300
Mar 7 1999
Mar 9 1999
Mar 7 1999
Mar 14 1999
Mar 18 1999
Apr
7 1999
Apr 10 1999
Apr
7 1999
Apr
1 1999
Apr
7 1999
expires in 96 hours
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATED
NEVER CALIB'D
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATED
NEVER CALIB'D
CALIBRATED
EXPIRED
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATOR
ACP VER
TP/ALB
ENZVER
AMONC
ENZVER
CHEM1
CHEM1
CHOLC
CK VER
ckmb ver
F1: PRINT
F3: SELECT
F8:
Max302264S-006
To see a list of all the methods you have selected, press F7: Selected
Lots.
Press function key F7 to view four other groupings of this information as
described in the table below.
List
What it contains
Recommended Lots
Same Product
Shows all reagent lots that use the same calibrator/verifier product.
To delete a calibration
you selected:
All Lots
Selected Lots
2-82
2
3
Go to the Calibration Set Up screen by pressing the Exit key and then
F2: Set-Up & Run.
Press F5: Next Method to display each method in the Selected Lots list
you just created.
2006/12
Using
After you enter the number of hours in the expires in field, the screen will
automatically be updated to show a list of those reagent cartridge calibrations
that will expire within that number of hours. The instrument will also automatically print out this list. This printout will also be automatically printed as
part of your Daily Maintenance printouts.
To enter a value in the expires in field:
1 Press F4: Exp Period.
2 Type the number of hours.
3 Press the Enter key. The screen updates to show all calibrations that will
expire in the next 24 hours.
For example, to see how many reagent calibrations will expire in the next 24
hours, use the steps above to enter 24 in the expires in field on the
screen.
Remove Reagent Lot Calibrations from Instrument Memory
If there are many reagent cartridge lots appearing on the Calibration Status
List screen (or the automatic printout from Daily Maintenance) that are no
longer available in your laboratory, follow the steps below to permanently
remove them from instrument memory.
2006/12
2
3
4
2-83
Using
2-84
2006/12
Maintaining
3-5
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
2006/12
3-1
Maintaining
2006/12
Maintaining
2006/12
3-3
Maintaining
3-4
2006/12
Maintaining
2006/12
3-5
Maintaining
Bleach Solutions
All references to a bleach solution, e.g. 10% bleach solution, refer to a
solution that is made by diluting an undiluted bleach product that meets the
criteria listed above with water (e.g.- to create a 10% bleach solution, add 10
mls of undiluted bleach to 90 mls of water to create 100 mls of 10% bleach
solution).
3-6
2006/12
Maintaining
Daily Maintenance
Tools and supplies:
4
5
6
Put the segments back into the instrument and close the sample and
reagent lids.
Press Pause to restart the sampler systems.
Open the right cabinet door and cut the cuvette string about 12 inches
down from the instrument. Be sure to cut the between two cuvettes to
prevent spilling fluids from a sealed cuvette. Empty the accumulated
cuvette waste.
WARNING: The cuvettes and the contents of the cuvettes may present a
biohazard or chemical hazard. Follow standard laboratory
procedures for protection from biohazards and chemicals
when performing maintenance and troubleshooting procedures.
3-7
Maintaining
OPERATING MENU
TEMPERATURE CHECK
Cuvette:
37.1 C
HM:
43.0 C
PUMP PRIME
Reagent:
6 C
( 3 Cycles)
ABS Lot:
Carton Values:
AB1245
395.0
POSITION
INITIALS
Failed QC: 2)
CD4512
394.0
SAMPLE ID
SAMPLE FLUID
SAMPLER CHECK
ABS
F4:
F6:
F7:
F8:
XP_3-7
1
2
3-8
2006/12
Maintaining
Cuvette System
36.8C 37.2C
Reagent System
2C 8C
HM System
42C 44C
SD
Reagent #1
(R1 Reagent Arm)
3.8
Reagent #2
(R2 Reagent Arm)
3.8
Sampler
0.8
HM Wash
1.6
IMT Dil
(non-HM only)
1.4
If a mean or standard
deviation IS NOT
reported...
System Check tests were
aborted for the reagent
systems or sampler system.
Go to the Error Log screen and
resolve any error messages
and rerun the System Check.
To go to the Error Log screen,
from the Operating Menu,
press:
F5: Process Ctrl
F6: Error Log
2006/12
3-9
Maintaining
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM COUNTERS
Installed: 1 - SEP - 2000 Bootups:
7 Cuvettes:
Dirty windows:
35
Item
Sample Probe :
Item
If function keys F6 or F7
have titles in them...
Additional modules that require
maintenance are installed on
your instrument.
Press these keys to see other
maintenance needed for that
module. Refer to the
Operators Guide for that
module for how to perform that
maintenance.
3-10
IMT Cycles:
Cycles
Clean at
319
20000
Cycles
582 Tests:
310
76
Last Cleaned
1- SEP -2000 12:02 Pos:
Replace at
Last Replaced
Replace
Cuvette Cartridge :
582
12000
Diaphragm :
582
12000
NO
319
48000
NO
R1 Probe Tip :
249
48000
NO
R2 Probe Tip :
48000
NO
F5:
F6: HM COUNTERS
F7: RMS
NO
Max3-9
Items where the Cycles field exceeds the Clean At or Replace At field appear
in red. Those items should be cleaned or replaced now or at your earliest
opportunity. Follow the appropriate cleaning or replacement procedure for
the item.
Contact your Field Service Representative to customize the R1 and R2 probe
tip replacement cycle.
2006/12
Maintaining
Use the appropriate procedures on the pages that follow to perform these
replacements.
Why wait...
Check all the fields to see if
there are other HM consumable fields that will probably
need attention later today or
tomorrow.
If you have the time now, why
not replace these also.
OPERATING MENU
Item
Last Replaced
Replace
Wash Buffer :
86 %
NO
66 %
NO
83 %
NO
100 %
NO
Last Replaced
Replace
NO
Item
Vessels in Waste :
Count
Replace at
201
250
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200203_3-11
2006/12
The number of reaction vessels in the waste container is continually monitored. When the count reaches 250, a Check Reaction Vessel Waste - Reset
Counter error message appears and unloading of additional vessels is prohibited. The user must empty this waste container and reset this counter to
continue unloading reaction vessels. This avoids overflowing the vessel
waste.
3-11
Maintaining
What is an unnecessary
lot?
A reagent cartridge lot for
which there are no more
reagent cartridges available in
the laboratory.
OPERATING MENU
TEMPERATURE CHECK
43.0 C
PUMP PRIME
( 3 Cycles)
SYSTEM CHECK (Cuvettes: 11418
ABS Lot:
Carton Values:
AB1245
395.0
POSITION
INITIALS
6 C
Reagent:
Failed QC: 2)
CD4512
394.0
SAMPLE ID
SAMPLE FLUID
SAMPLER CHECK
ABS
F4:
F6:
F7:
F8:
XP_3-7
Press F5: Offboard Lots. Enter the password and press the Enter key.
METHOD
ACP
ALB
ALP
AMON
AMY
BUN
BUN
CHOL
CK
CKMB
Before deleting...
Double-check the method
lot number on the screen!
LOT
offboard lots
EXPIRATION
KJ5125
WC5133
MP5225
AG5175
DT5290
FG5165
GB5225
RT5340
SJ5285
LY5300
Nov 7 2000
Nov 9 2000
Nov 7 2000
Nov 14 2000
Nov 18 2000
Nov 7 2000
Nov 10 2000
Nov 7 2000
Nov 1 2000
Nov 7 2000
expires in 48 hours
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATED
NEVER CALIB'D
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATED
NEVER CALIB'D
CALIBRATED
EXPIRED
CALIBRATED
CALIBRATOR
ACP VER
TP/ALB
ENZVER
AMONC
ENZVER
CHEM1
CHEM1
CHOLC
CK VER
ckmb ver
F1: PRINT
F2:
F3: DELETE
F4:
3
4
5
3-12
37.1 C
HM:
Cuvette:
Maintaining
Weekly Maintenance
Tools and supplies:
cotton swabs
0.1N sodium hydroxide
water
HM PUMP PRIME
PLEASE SELECT AN OPTION USING THE FUNCTION KEYS:
CYCLES: 3
HM
WASH
REAGENT
CLEANER
SAMPLER
CLEANER
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
P200717-100S
2
3
2006/12
3-13
Maintaining
Turn the splined shaft on the R2 reagent arm until the R2 probe comes up
out of the R2 reagent drain. Then move the arm until you can easily
access the R2 probe.
Dip a clean cotton swab in 0.1N sodium hydroxide and scrub the nut at
the top of the probe tube. Then, beginning at the top, wipe down the
outside of the R2 reagent probe.
6
7
3-14
2006/12
Maintaining
Monthly Maintenance
Only trained operators should perform these procedures.
The monthly maintenance procedures are:
Replacing IMT Pump Tubing
Replacing the Monopump Valve Seal
Cleaning the IMT System
Replacing Instrument Air Filters
If your instrument is equipped with the HM module, two additional procedures are required:
Replacing HM Pump Head
Styletting HM Wash Probes
The replacement procedures use tools and commonly replaced parts that are
provided in your Accessory Spare Parts kit. After you use a spare part from
this kit, be sure to order a new one from Dade Behring Inc.
2006/12
3-15
Maintaining
Tubing X2
Pressure Plates
Foot Bar
Tubing X
Pressure Plates
Max200209_01
4
5
6
7
8
3-16
2006/12
Krytox grease
disposable gloves
gauze
Maintaining
Loosen the large thumbscrew on top of the retaining lever and slide the
retaining lever backward.
CAUTION! Do not pinch tubing when moving the retaining lever back.
Thumbscrew
Valve
Motor
Retaining
Lever
Valve Body
240883B-171a
2006/12
3-17
Maintaining
Lift the valve motor off the valve body, turn it over, and remove the valve
seal from the valve seal holder on the encoder assembly.
Valve
Motor
Encoder
Assembly
Valve Seal
Clean Inside
Valve Body
Valve Body
Retaining Lever
240883B-173
Service Tip
Do not apply too much Krytox
grease to the valve seal. The
grease can clog the slot
opening in the seal.
Service Tip
Do not screw the large
thumbscrew down too tight!
Tighten this screw until the
motor housing contacts the
valve body; then continue to
tighten another 1/8th turn.
If this screw is tightened too
much, you may get Lost Steps
error messages.
3-18
Clean the inside of the valve body with a gauze pad lightly moistened
with water.
6 Lubricate the new valve seal with Krytox grease. Place a pinhead-sized
drop of grease on your gloved forefinger. Gently rub your gloved forefinger and thumb together, then rub both sides of the seal between your
thumb and forefinger.
7 Install the new valve seal with the flat side against the valve seal holder
on the valve motor assembly. The X and the slot on the seal should be
visible.
8 Press down firmly on the encoder assembly and ensure that it springs
back with a click sound. If it doesnt, call the Technical Assistance Center
to order a new motor.
9 Reinstall the valve motor onto the valve body ensuring that the wires are
toward the rear of the instrument. Be sure the motor is seated firmly on
the valve body.
10 Slide the retaining lever on the pump forward and tighten the large
thumbscrew on top of the pump assembly.
CAUTION! Do not pinch tubing when moving the retaining lever forward.
After tightening the thumbscrew, check that you can turn the valve motor
with slight resistance. If you cannot turn the motor, the thumbscrew is too
tight; if there is no resistance, the thumbscrew is too loose.
11 Press Pause to restart the IMT sampling system.
2006/12
Maintaining
12 From the Pump Prime Menu screen, prime the monopump by moving the
cursor to the Cycles field, typing 3 for the number of prime cycles to be
performed, and pressing Enter. Then press F5: IMT Mono Pump.
13 For non-HM instruments, run a System Check.
14 Replace the QuikLYTE sensor by following the entire procedure (steps
114) in Module 2: Using, Replacing the QuikLYTE Integrated
Multisensor.
CAUTION! You MUST replace the QuikLYTE sensor after replacing the
monopump valve seal.
15 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
3-19
Maintaining
OPERATING MENU
undiluted bleach
disposable pipettes
serum or plasma
water
QuikLYTE Integrated
Multisensor
2. Bleach Tubing: Fill port with undiluted bleach. Press F8: START SOAK
3. Condition Tubing: Fill port with serum or plasma. Press F8: START SOAK.
4. Change Sensor. Press F7.
F1:
F2:
F4:
F5:
F6:
2
3
5
3-20
2006/12
Maintaining
Using a disposable pipette, fill the port with undiluted bleach. Press
F8: Start Soak. The IMT probe moves to the port and is bleached by the
system. Make sure the fluid is flowing through the tubing.
WARNING: Do not place your hands near the port while the probe is being
cleaned with bleach. You could injure yourself, be exposed to
biohazards, or damage the instrument.
The fluid sits in the tubing for two minutes. When the soak is complete,
the system primes Standard A.
8 Using a disposable pipette, fill the port with serum or plasma.
9 Press F8: Start Soak. Make sure the fluid is flowing through the tubing.
10 The fluid sits in the tubing for two minutes. When the soak is complete,
the system primes Standard A.
11 Press F7: Change Sensor.
CAUTION! You MUST replace the QuikLYTE sensor after bleaching
the IMT system.
12 Replace the QuikLYTE Integrated Multisensor (see the procedure in the
topic "Replacing IMT Consumables" in Module 2: Using.
13 Document the cleaning on the Monthly Log sheet.
2006/12
3-21
Maintaining
Phillips screwdriver
disposable thermal
chamber filters
To replace
Cabinet (non-RMS
only)
This filter is located on the rear of the instrument. Slide the filter up
out of its holder. The air flow arrow on the new filter should point
IN toward the instrument.
240883B-19
Card Cage
Open the left instrument door and pull the filter out of its holder. The air
flow arrow on the new filter should point UP toward the keyboard.
Card Cage Filter
3-22
2006/12
Maintaining
Filter
To replace
Power Supply
Open the left instrument door and remove the thumbscrew that holds
the frame for the two power supply air filters. The air flow arrow on the
new filters should point IN toward the instrument.
Remove the right instrument cabinet panel and slide the filter up
out of its holder. The air flow arrow on the new filter should point IN
toward the instrument.
Cuvette Ring Filter
240883B-97
2006/12
3-23
Maintaining
Filter
To replace
Thermal Chamber
Pull the filter cover and filter off of their plastic frame. This filter
does not have any air flow arrows; it cannot be installed backwards.
Cabinet and
Cuvette Ring
(RMS only)
3-24
Remove all dust from the used filter (except the thermal chamber filter
pictured above, which must be replaced) by washing with water and air
drying or by using a vacuum cleaner. You can reuse these filters next
month.
Document these replacements on the Monthly log sheet.
2006/12
Maintaining
paper towels
OPERATING MENU
HM PUMP PRIME
CYCLES: 3
HM
WASH
REAGENT
CLEANER
SAMPLER
CLEANER
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
P200717-100S
Access the pump head to be replaced. There are two sets of pump heads:
one set is on the frame of the wash station and the other is on the pump
panel inside the instrument cabinet.
Pump Heads
To Access
Wash Station
Pump Head
Wash Pump #2
Pump Head
Wash Pump #1
300178A-010
2006/12
3-25
Maintaining
Pump Heads
To Access
Probe Cleaner
Open the middle cabinet door and the pump panel assembly.
The probe cleaner pump heads are located on the lower left
side of the pump panel assembly.
Pump Head
Sample Probe
Cleaner
Pump Head
Reagent Probe
Cleaner
300178A-011
3
4
Squeeze
These Tabs
300178A-032
3-26
2006/12
5
Use the shipping plug...
The shipping plug (or T)
must be inserted into the
pump head BEFORE
installing onto the motor to
prevent damage to the pump
rollers as the pump head is
pushed onto the motor shaft.
6
Quick primer for priming...
1 Type the number 3 in the
Cycles field.
2 Press Enter.
3 Press one of the following:
F1: HM Wash Pump,
F2: Reag Cleaner, or
F3: Samp Cleaner
to prime the new pump
head.
2006/12
7
8
Maintaining
3-27
Maintaining
screwdriver
IMT stylet
paper towels
OPERATING MENU
HM PUMP PRIME
CYCLES: 3
HM
WASH
REAGENT
CLEANER
SAMPLER
CLEANER
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
P200717-100S
2
3
Detach from
green
blue
Wash
Probe
Aspirate
Tubing
Bottom
Plastic
Guard
300178A-005c
3-28
2006/12
4
5
Maintaining
Using a screwdriver, remove the bottom plastic guard from the wash
station.
Pass an IMT stylet completely through the aspirate probe of each wash
station probe to dislodge any obstructions/accumulations. Pass the stylet
down through the probe and pull the stylet out through the bottom of the
probe.
WARNING: The beveled wash station probes are a biohazard and a
puncture hazard; use your laboratorys safe biohazard procedures for contact with these probes.
Insert
Stylet
Here
Lip
Sleeve
Positioning
Groove
Dispense
Probe
Aspirate
Probe
P200717-91
2006/12
8
9
10
11
Detach from
green
blue
3-29
Maintaining
Other Maintenance
Only trained operators should perform these procedures.
The procedures decribed in this section are for maintenance that is required
periodically or for troubleshooting.
3-30
2006/12
screwdriver
Maintaining
Pull the knob on the cuvette film cartridge bracket and swing the film
cartridge down out of the way.
Place a screwdriver into the hole of the thermal chamber release bracket
and push the screwdriver down on the internal release plate. Do not use a
prying motion. Continue pushing the screwdriver until the thermal
chamber drops down completely.
Push Screwdriver
Into Hole To Release
Thermal Chamber
240883B-83
2006/12
3-31
Maintaining
240883B-135
3-32
Adjust the tension in the cuvette file. From the Film Loading/Tension
screen, press F2: Tension. When the tensioning is complete, press F2:
Tension again if the film is not taut.
2006/12
Maintaining
digital thermometer
OPERATING MENU
Cuvette
Reagent
System Calibrated
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Photometer Lamp On
1 C
F7:
2
Warmup time...
YES
37.1 C
RxL/ARx
THIS SIDE UP
CB001010-01-017RxL
2006/12
3-33
Maintaining
Raise the reagent and sample lids and place the digital thermometer probe
in the cuvette hole at the sample access position.
Use the location mark to find the sample probe cuvette access hole.
There is an indentation in the baseplate at the sample probe cuvette access
location.
4 Close the reagent and sample lids and ensure that all instrument doors and
panels are closed.
The temperature
appears...
In the message area of the
screen as you enter it, not at
the bottom of the Cuvette
column on the screen as you
might expect.
3-34
2006/12
2006/12
Maintaining
Wait until the cuvette Thermal Signal Acquisition Interval field counts
down to 0 and changes to YES. If all other cuvette fields are also YES,
read the temperature on the digital thermometer.
If the temperature is outside the 32C to 42C range, do not enter the
temperature. Call the Technical Assistance Center.
If the cuvette temperature on the thermometer is between 32C to 42C,
continue with step 6.
Remove the digital thermometer probe and sleeve from the cuvette access
hole and close the instrument lids. Then press the space bar on the keyboard, and again wait until all the cuvette fields are YES.
Press F2: Calib Cuvette, enter the temperature from the digital thermometer, and press Enter. You are finished. The instrument will now make
cuvette thermal adjustments automatically.
3-35
Maintaining
OPERATING MENU
digital thermometer
Cuvette
Reagent
System Calibrated
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Photometer Lamp On
YES
37.1 C
F7:
Warm-up time...
The instrument must be on for
more than two hours before a
proper temperature calibration
can be performed.
1 C
225155A-011
The temperature
appears...
In the message area of the
screen as you enter it, not at
the bottom of the Reagent
column on the screen as you
might expect.
Hole for
Probe
240883B-102
3-36
2006/12
4
5
2006/12
Maintaining
Close the reagent lid and ensure that all instrument doors and panels are
closed.
Wait until the temperature on the digital thermometer equilibrates (approximately 30 seconds). If all the reagent fields are also YES, read the
temperature on the digital thermometer.
If the reagent tray temperature on the thermometer is between 2 to
+10C, continue with step 6.
If it is outside this temperature range, call the Technical Assistance
Center.
Remove the digital thermometer probe from the reagent tray temperature
measurement hole, close the reagent lid, and then press the space bar on
the keyboard.
Press F6: Calib Reagent, enter the temperature from the digital thermometer, and press Enter. You are finished. The instrument will now
make reagent thermal adjustments automatically!
If the message The value entered is outside the allowed calibration
range appears in the message area of the screen after pressing Enter, it
is because the temperature you tried to enter is not within the 2 to
+10C temperature range. Perform this reagent system temperature
calibration procedure again. If the temperature on the digital thermometer
is still not within 2 to +10C, call the Technical Assistance Center.
3-37
Maintaining
digital thermometer
OPERATING MENU
Cuvette
Reagent
System Calibrated
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Photometer Lamp On
YES
37.1 C
1 C
F7:
Warm-up time...
4
5
3-38
Wait three minutes for the temperature to equilibrate and then read the
temperature on the digital thermometer. If the temperature is between
40C to 46C, continue with step 4. If the temperature is outside this
range, call the Technical Assistance Center.
Remove the digital thermometer probe.
Press F4: Calib HM Incu, enter the temperature from the digital thermometer, and press Enter.
2006/12
needlenose pliers or
cuvette window
extractor tool
lens paper
water
Maintaining
DIAGNOSTICS MENU
WINDOW CHECK
Access: ACCESS ALL
Top Seal: ON
Check Bad Limit: 35 mA
Last Clean Date:
Print: OFF
F6:
F7:
2006/12
3-39
Maintaining
2
3
A window MUST be in
each position on the
cuvette ring!
7
8
9
3-40
2006/12
Maintaining
2
3
This works only with
Cleaning Bad Windows.
Want to set your own
tighterwindow check
limit? Use the Check
Bad Limit field!
Enter the limit you want the
software to use to determine
whether a window is acceptable to use.
Values in this field can be
between 10 and 35.
The system will indicate any
windows that do not meet this
limit with red xs meaning that
these windows will be
presented for cleaning.
NOTE: The software default
value for this field is 15. The
lower the limit, the more
windows you probably will
have to clean during this
window check, but you will find
that you will need to clean
windows less frequently.
2006/12
3-41
Maintaining
Needlenose
Pliers
240883B-75
Removing a cuvette
window using the
extractor tool:
With the flat side of the
extractor facing the cuvette
ring, insert the extractor
straight down until it touches
the top of the window. Tilt the
handle toward you to grip the
window and hold it in place.
Pull the extractor up to remove
the window.
3-42
2006/12
Maintaining
This Side
Faces you
240883B-1
2006/12
3-43
Maintaining
undiluted bleach
sample cup
Waste Tubing
2
3
Fill a sample cup with water and place the waste tubing in the cup to
flush any residual bleach from the waste line.
Connect the waste tubing.
Calibrate the IMT.
5
6
3-44
Max200209_05
2006/12
Maintaining
4
5
2006/12
3-45
Maintaining
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM COUNTERS
Installed: 1 - SEP - 2000 Bootups:
7 Cuvettes:
Dirty windows:
35
Item
Sample Probe :
Item
A case-insensitive field...
The Pos: field entry can be
either a lowercase or a capital
letter.
IMT Cycles:
Cycles
Clean at
319
20000
Cycles
582 Tests:
310
76
Last Cleaned
1- SEP -2000 12:02 Pos:
Replace at
Last Replaced
Replace
Cuvette Cartridge :
582
12000
NO
Diaphragm :
582
12000
NO
319
48000
NO
R1 Probe Tip :
249
48000
NO
R2 Probe Tip :
48000
NO
F5:
F6: HM COUNTERS
F7:
Max3-9
2
3
4
5
6
7
3-46
2006/12
Maintaining
Manually lift and move the sample arm away from the sample drain.
12 Repeat steps 9 and 10 three times. When you are finished, leave the probe
out of the drain.
13 Close the instrument lids and then press the Reset key.
2006/12
3-47
Maintaining
3-48
2006/12
grease, PN 270921, in
Accessory Spare Parts Kit
talc-free disposable gloves
lint-free dry cloth
Maintaining
2006/12
3-49
Maintaining
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3-50
2006/12
aliquot wheel
Maintaining
Lift the covered, used aliquot wheel off the instrument and discard it.
Aliquot
Wheel
Aliquot
Wheel Lid
5
6
7
2006/12
3-51
Maintaining
screwdriver
5/64" Allen wrench
Heres how!
Instead of performing steps 3
and 4 of the procedure at the
right, do these instead:
3 Remove the left rear
cabinet panel of the
instrument.
4 Locate the aliquot wheel
home sensor and its
bracket (its about in the
middle of the baseplate,
directly underneath the
aliquot wheel) and
disconnect P/J 31F.
Using a large screwdriver, remove three screws that hold the aliquot
wheel assembly in the instrument. Hold this assembly up by its center
shaft as you remove the last screw, and lower it down inside the instrument.
Aliquot Wheel
Screws
240883B-103
3-52
Remove the left rear cabinet panel (the larger panel). Then locate and
disconnect P/J 31C, P/J 31E, and P/J 31F and remove the aliquot wheel
assembly through the rear of the instrument.
Using a 5/64" Allen wrench, remove two screws from the sensor bracket
and remove the sensor from the aliquot wheel assembly.
2006/12
Properly install the new sensor onto the aliquot wheel assembly and
reinstall the assembly into the instrument by reversing the previous steps.
Be careful not to install this sensor backwards! See the illustration below
for proper orientation of the sensor.
Maintaining
This Side of
Sensor Faces
the Aliquot Wheel
240883B-154
7
8
9
2006/12
Install the same aliquot wheel removed in step 2 back on the instrument.
Close the sample and aliqout wheel lids and press the Pause key to restart
the IMT sampling system.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-53
Maintaining
Aliquot
Wheel Lid
Open Sensor
Aliquot
Wheel Lid
Aliquot
Wheel
240883B-105
5
6
3-54
Close the sample and aliquot wheel lids and press the Pause key to restart
the IMT sampling system.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
Maintaining
Raise the bar code reader out of the way, unscrew the alignment bar
thumbscrew and raise the alignment bar out of the way.
WARNING: When working in the cuvette manufacturing area, be very
careful not to touch the U-seal solenoidit can be extremely
HOT! If components are hot, wait about five minutes for them
to cool before continuing with this procedure.
2006/12
3-55
Maintaining
Unlock the U-seal solenoid assembly by pulling its curved locking bar to
the right; then move this assembly to the left and out of the way.
6
7
Pull the cuvette formation assembly away from the cuvette ring.
Remove the used cuvette diaphragm by lifting an edge and pulling it up
off the heat torch.
CAUTION! Do not pull the soft tip out of position while replacing the diaphragm.
3-56
2006/12
Install the new cuvette diaphragm. The circular hole should be toward the
bottom of the heat torch. The U-shaped notch should face toward you. Be
sure the diaphragm is pushed down completely.
Push the cuvette formation assembly back into position next to the
cuvette ring.
Put the U-seal solenoid assembly in its original position and lock it in
place with the curved bar.
Position the alignment bar and tighten its screw.
Lower the barcode reader.
Press any key. When the prompt Do you want to store the NEW
system information? (y/n) appears, type y to update the System
Counters screen.
Close the reagent lid.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
10
11
12
13
14
15
2006/12
Maintaining
3-57
Maintaining
scissors
transparent tape
SYSTEM COUNTERS
500
F2: TENSION
F5:
F6:
F7:
Open the right instrument door. Use scissors to cut the right and left film
strips on the used cuvette cartridge between the cartridge and the baseplate. Leave at least six inches of film hanging from the instrument.
Slide the used cartridge off the film holder and discard it.
Pull up on the red plastic key in the center of the new cartridge to remove
the plastic ring.
3-58
2006/12
5
6
Be sure to tape these
strips together well...
You dont want these strips to
separate inside the instrument.
That could result in a call to
the Technical Assistance
Center!
Maintaining
Slide the new cartridge onto the film holder and raise it until the release
knob locks in place.
Pull the left film strip out of the cartridge. Overlap it about one-half inch
over the left strip of old film hanging from the instrument and align the
sides of these two film strips. Then use the red tape from the new cartridge to tape these strips together. Repeat the overlapping, aligning and
taping with the right strip of film.
7
8
2006/12
Press F1: Load Film. Wait for the counter to reset to 12000 and motion
to stop.
After film loading is complete, check to see that there is no slack in the
film coming out of the cuvette film cartridge. If there is, press F1: Load
Film again.
3-59
Maintaining
screwdriver
Cuvette Ring
Sensor
240883B-174
4
When installing the
cuvette ring sensor...
Push the sensor completely up
until it snaps into place.
5
6
7
8
9
3-60
Grip the sensor firmly and pull it straight down off its spring clip and post
and then disconnect P/J 32B.
Install the new cuvette ring sensor.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
Perform the Cuvette Ring Alignment and the alignment portion of the
Photometer Alignment procedure in Module 4: Aligning.
Perform a System Check.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
screwdriver
5/64-in. Allen wrench
Maintaining
4
5
6
7
2006/12
Disconnect sensor connector P/J 22B. Then use the 5/64" Allen wrench
to remove the screw that secures the sensor to the instrument.
Install the new home sensor by reversing the previous steps.
Close the sample and reagent lids and press the Pause key to restart the
sampling system.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-61
Maintaining
7
8
3-62
Close the sample and reagent lids and press the Pause key to restart the
sampling system.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
Maintaining
screwdriver
Replacing AC Fuses
1 Perform the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure in Module 1:
Introducing.
AC Fuses Amperage
AC fuses are numbered from right to
left on the faceplate. Their respective
amperages, A, are:
F1 0.5 A Front Panel Fan
F2 1.6 A Thermal Chamber Fan
F3 1.6 A Spare
F4 0.5 A Rear Panel Fan Assy
F5 1.6 A Waste Pump
F6 6.3 A Refrigerator Compressor
F7 1.6 A Refrigerator Solenoid
F8 3.15 A Vacuum Pump
F9 1.6 A Air Compressor
F10 1.6 A Spare
F11 1.6 A Inst. Cabinet Fan
2
3
4
Replacing DC Fuses
1 Perform the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure in Module 1:
Introducing.
DC Fuses
Max200303_03
2
3
4
2006/12
Maintaining
3-64
Unlock the U-seal solenoid assembly by pulling its curved locking bar to
the right; then move this assembly to the left and out of the way.
Pull the cuvette formation assembly away from the cuvette ring.
2006/12
Maintaining
7
8
10 Install the new heat torch assembly by reversing the previous steps.
11 Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
12 Perform a System Check.
13 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
3-65
Maintaining
screwdriver
9/64" T-handle Allen wrench
Unscrew the wash wheel locking knob and then use the knob to lift the
wash wheel out of the instrument.
Wash
Probe
Tubing
Probe
Thumbscrew
Plastic
Guard
300178A-006
3-66
2006/12
Maintaining
Using a 9/64" T-handle Allen wrench, remove the three screws that hold
the magnet ring in the instrument and lift the magnet ring out of the
instrument.
Magnet Ring
Screws
Bracket Screw
Wash Wheel
Home Sensor
Bracket Screw
Incubate Wheel
Home Sensor
300178A-007
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2006/12
3-67
Maintaining
screwdriver
9/64" T-handle Allen wrench
Unscrew the wash wheel locking knob and use the knob to lift the wash
wheel out of the instrument.
Plastic
Guard
Wash
Wheel
Locking
Knob
300178A-006a
3-68
2006/12
Maintaining
Using a 9/64" T-handle Allen wrench, remove the three screws that hold
the magnet ring in the instrument. Lift the magnet ring out of the instrument.
Magnet Ring
Screws
300178A-007a
Using a screwdriver, remove the two screws that hold the mixer assembly
sensor board to the mixer assembly.
PC Board
Screws
2006/12
3-69
Maintaining
To perform a mixer
calibration
1 Go to the HM Module
Alignments screen. From
the Operating Menu, press:
F7: Diagnostics
F3: Alignments
F6: HM Module
2 Press F5: Mixer Calib.
The instrument will perform the
mixer calibration and prompt
you when it is finished.
Lift the sensor board up until you can disconnect electrical connector
P/J44B and remove the sensor board from the instrument. Discard the old
sensor. Using the Allen wrench, remove the two screws that hold the
mixer assembly in place.
Remove Screws
Screws
b. Position the magnet ring in the instrument. Reinsert and tighten the
three screws.
c. Place one of the three alignment cutouts in the incubate wheel onto
the incubate wheel alignment pin.
d. Position one of the three alignment holes in the wash wheel onto the
wash wheel alignment pin and push the wash wheel onto the instrument.
e. Tighten the wash wheel locking knob.
f. Reinstall the bottom plastic guard onto the wash station.
3-70
2006/12
Maintaining
2006/12
3-71
Maintaining
To Access
Wash Station
Pump Head
Wash Pump #2
Pump Head
Wash Pump #1
300178A-010
Pump Head/Motor
To Access
Pump Panel
Open the middle cabinet door and the pump panel assembly.
Pump Head
Sample Probe
Cleaner
Pump Head
Reagent Probe
Cleaner
300178A-011
3-72
2006/12
4
5
Maintaining
Disconnect the top and bottom tubing from the pump head at its connectors.
Pump Head/Motor
Connector
Tubing Identification
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
Top
Bottom
To Sample Drain
To Sample Probe Cleaner bottle
Top
Bottom
To R2 Drain
To Probe Cleaner bottle (reagent)
Pump Head
Screws
Tubing
Pump Head
Screws
Tubing
Max200209_06
2006/12
3-73
Maintaining
3-74
2006/12
screwdriver
Maintaining
Sensor is located...
The shuttle home sensor is
mounted on the vessel shuttle
guide motor block.
Shuttle
Home
Sensor
3
4
5
6
7
2006/12
Unplug electrical connector P/J 48E from the Vessel Transfer PC board
and remove the shuttle home sensor from the instrument.
Install the new shuttle home sensor and reconnect P/J 48E.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
Perform a System Check.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-75
Maintaining
Cable
Clamp
Vessel
Detect
Switch
300178A-018
3
4
5
6
7
8
3-76
Using a 9/64" Allen wrench, remove the screw that holds the cable clamp
that contains the electrical cable for the switch.
Unplug electrical connector P/J 48C from the Vessel Transfer PC board
and remove the vessel detect switch from the instrument.
Install the new vessel detect switch and reconnect P/J 48C.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
Perform a System Check.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
Maintaining
paper towels
OPERATING MENU
HM PUMP PRIME
REAGENT
CLEANER
SAMPLER
CLEANER
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
P200717-100S
2
3
Wash
Probe
Tubing
Probe
Thumbscrew
300178A-005
2006/12
3-77
Maintaining
Loosen the probe thumbscrew until you can lift the probe up and out of
the wash station. Discard the probe.
WARNING: These beveled wash station probes are a biohazard and a
puncture hazard. Use your laboratorys safe biohazard waste
disposal procedures for contact with and disposal of these
probes in a sharps container.
Position the new wash probe in the wash station so that its dispense probe
is toward the front edge of the wash station. Gently push the probe all the
way down until its lip contacts the probe holder.
Positioning groove
When the probe is inserted
properly, the positioning
groove on the probe ensures
that the probe lip contacts its
holder in the wash station.
Lip
Sleeve
Positioning
Groove
Dispense
Probe
Aspirate
Probe
300178A-031
Tighten the probe thumbscrew and connect the tubing to the new probe.
Tubing Color Number
3-78
Attaches to
red
green
3
4
yellow
blue
1
2
7
8
Maintaining
Push Platform
Down to Access
Sensor
300178A-014
2006/12
Using a 5/64" Allen wrench, remove the screw that holds the wash probe
home sensor in the instrument.
5 Disconnect electrical connector P/J 45B and remove the sensor from the
instrument.
6 Install the new wash probe home sensor and reconnect P/J 45B.
7 Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
8 Align the wash probes to the wash wheel.
a. Go to the HM Module Alignments screen.
b. Move the cursor to the Wash Probes to Wash Wheel field.
c. Press F7: Check Align. If you need more information on performing
this alignment, refer to the HM Module Alignments procedure
Module 4: Aligning.
9 Perform a System Check.
10 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-79
Maintaining
paper towels
OPERATING MENU
HM PUMP PRIME
PLEASE SELECT AN OPTION USING THE FUNCTION KEYS:
CYCLES: 3
HM
WASH
REAGENT
CLEANER
SAMPLER
CLEANER
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
P200717-100S
2
3
3-80
Tubing Wrap
Color
Number
Attaches to
yellow
blue
2 (long)
blue
2 (short)
red
green
4 (long)
green
4 (short)
2006/12
Maintaining
Install the new tubing. (Refer to the table on the previous page.)
Vacuum Sensor
Wash
Wash
Probe 2 Probe 1
300178A-015
2006/12
5
6
7
3-81
Maintaining
screwdriver
WARNING: All reaction vessels removed from the wash wheel and incubate wheel are biohazards. Dispose of them according to your
laboratorys safe biohazard disposal procedures.
Unscrew the wash wheel locking knob and then use the knob to lift the
wash wheel out of the instrument.
Bottom
Plastic
Guard
Wash Wheel
300178A-017
6
7
8
9
3-82
2006/12
Maintaining
Sensor
Cartridge
Interface
Max200209_07
Refer to the illustration on the next page to identify where the IMT
miscellaneous tubing is located within the IMT system. Then refer to the
pages that follow the illustration for how to replace each piece of tubing.
The IMT miscellaneous tubing to be replaced is labeled: D1, D2, F1, F2,
R1, X2, W2, and W.
WARNING: The X2, W2, and W tubing are biohazards. Follow your
laboratorys safe biohazard waste disposal procedures to
discard this tubing.
5
6
7
8
9
2006/12
After replacing all the tubing, return the IMT sensor cartridge interface to
its locked, upright position.
Press the Pause key to restart the IMT sampling system and then prime
the IMT system with Salt Bridge solution.
Run a condition/soak cycle (see Conditioning the IMT System earlier in
this section).
Calibrate the IMT.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-83
Maintaining
Tubing W2 is connected to the IMT Sample Port under the instrument baseplate.
IMT
Pump
D1
R1
X
QuikLYTE
X2
Salt
Bridge
Solution
Sample
Diluent
IMT
Sample
Port
X1
X2
W2
To
Waste
R1
1
2
X0
X1
D2
X1
D1
To
Waste
Air
IMT
Rotary Valve
Flush
Standard B
F1
Out
Out
Diluent
Pump
P55F
F2
Out
Flush
Pump
P55E
Standard A
PN 752007.001 Rev. A
3-84
2006/12
Maintaining
Tubing
To replace...
R1
Disconnect and replace this tubing and bottle cap combination. Ensure
that the new tubing is placed completely into the pinch valve on the back
of the sensor cartridge interface.
R1
R1 Attaches Here
X1 Attaches Here
300177A-04
D1 and D2
F1 and F2
W2
1 Using the 3/32" Allen wrench, remove the two screws that hold the IMT
port to the baseplate and lift the IMT port up until its solenoid valve is
accessible.
X2
Disconnect and replace this tubing. The waste tubing connects to the waste
bottle inside the instrument cabinet.
2006/12
3-85
Maintaining
2
3
Disconnect the IMT probe tubing from the top of the probe.
Unscrew and remove the black probe locking guide and remove the
electrical connector. Then pull the used probe out of the IMT arm.
WARNING: This beveled probe is a biohazard and a puncture hazard.
Follow your laboratorys safe handling procedures for contact
with and disposal of this probe in a sharps container.
3-86
Slide the new probe into the IMT arm and then slide the round electrical
connector onto the top of the probe.
5 Reinstall the black probe locking guide and push the IMT probe tubing
onto the new probe.
6 Close the sample lid and press the Pause key to restart the IMT sampling
system.
7 Perform all the IMT probe alignments in the IMT Probe Alignments
procedure in Module 4: Aligning.
8 If you have an HM module on your instrument, only run QC for electrolytes. For non-HM instruments, run a System Check and QC for electrolytes.
9 If the QC is out, replace the QuikLYTE sensor by following the entire
procedure (steps 114) in Module 2: Using, Replacing the QuikLYTE
Integrated Multisensor.
10 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
Maintaining
2
3
Disconnect the IMT probe tubing from the top of the IMT probe and from
its connection on port #1 of the monopump.
Pull the IMT probe tubing out of the instrument and discard it.
WARNING: The IMT probe and tubing are biohazards; use your
laboratorys safe biohazard waste disposal procedure when
discarding this tubing.
5
6
2006/12
Connect the new IMT probe tubing onto the IMT probe and then route it
into the tubing guide at the rear of the IMT arm until it comes out of the
hole in the baseplate. This tubing connects to port #1 of the monopump.
Close the sample lid and press the Pause key to restart the IMT sampling
system.
If you have an HM module on your instrument, only run QC for electrolytes. For non-HM instruments, run a System Check and QC for electrolytes.
If the QC is out, replace the QuikLYTE sensor by following the entire
procedure in Module 2: Using, Replacing the QuikLYTE Integrated
Multisensor.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-87
Maintaining
Krytox lubricant
3/32" Allen wrench
paper towels
disposable gloves
gauze
needlenose pliers
2
Getting to the Fluids
Prime/Pump Alignment
screen..
3-88
2006/12
Maintaining
Motor
Encoder
Assembly
Valve Seal
Clean Inside
Valve Body
Valve Body
Service Tip...
9
10
11
12
13
2006/12
Press down firmly on the encoder assembly and ensure that it springs
back with a click sound. If it doesnt, call the Technical Assistance Center
to order a new motor.
Clean the inside of the valve body with a gauze pad lightly moistened
with water.
Lubricate the new rotary valve seal with Krytox grease. Place a pinheadsized drop of grease on your gloved forefinger. Gently rub your gloved
forefinger and thumb together, then rub both sides of the seal between
your thumb and forefinger.
Install the new rotary valve seal with the flat side against the valve seal
holder on the valve motor assembly. The X and the slot on the seal
should be visible.
Reinstall the motor assembly into the valve body using the four screws or
posts. Completely tighten these four screws using the needlenose pliers.
Reconnect the tubing to the Standard A and Standard B bags and close
the keyboard.
Prime Standard A, Standard B, and the Flush solution.
Calibrate the IMT.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-89
Maintaining
Raise the sample lid and the small IMT access door and locate the IMT
Rotary Valve.
3-90
2006/12
Maintaining
Using needlenose pliers, remove four screws or four posts at each corner
in the top of the IMT Rotary Valve and then lift the rotary valve motor
off the valve body.
Motor
Encoder
Assembly
Valve Seal
Valve Sensor
Valve Body
Using the 3/32" Allen wrench, remove two screws that secure the sensor
to the IMT Rotary Valve body.
5 Disconnect electrical connector P184/J184 and remove the sensor from
the valve body.
6 Install the new sensor on the valve body.
7 Reinstall the motor assembly into the valve body using the four screws or
posts. Completely tighten these four screws using the needlenose pliers.
8 Reconnect the tubing to the Standard A and Standard B bags and close
the keyboard.
9 Prime Standard A, Standard B, and the Flush solution.
10 Calibrate the IMT.
11 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
3-91
Maintaining
screwdriver
X0
To QuikLYTE
Integrated
Multisensor
IMT
Rotary
Valve
X1
B
From
Standard B
Bag
A
From
Standard A
Bag
P200717-48
3-92
2006/12
2006/12
6
7
8
9
10
11
Maintaining
3-93
Maintaining
IMT Sample
Handler
Rotational
Sensor
231257A-89-S
3-94
IMT Sample
Handler
Vertical
Sensor
231257A-90-SG
2006/12
Phillips screwdriver
Reminder:
Heres where to connect the
monopump tubing when you
reinstall it.
Port 1 - tubing wrapped with
blue tape and labeled
Monopump #1.
Port 2 - tubing that has no blue
tape on it.
Port 3 - tubing wrapped with
blue tape and labeled
Monopump #3.
Maintaining
3
4
Pump Base
Mounting Screw
Latch
302045B-139
2006/12
Maintaining
6 Carefully pull the plastic center tab on the monopump forward while
slowly opening the top portion of the pump, exposing the piston home
sensor located on the underside of this top portion.
Spring
Center
Tab
Pump
Mounting
Base
240883B-158
Remove the piston sensor mounting screw. To access this screw, turn the
orange piston drive belt and move the sensors home flag out of the way.
Piston
Sensor
Piston
Sensor
Bracket
Piston Sensor
Mounting Screw
Orange
Piston Belt
Sensor Flag
240883B-157
8
9
3-96
2006/12
Maintaining
On the right side of the monopump, place your finger on the orange belt
and move it clockwise (toward you) until the belt cannot be moved any
further.
Silver-Colored
Adjustment Screw
Opening to Access
Orange Belt
302045A-169
2006/12
Maintaining
Krytox grease
disposable gloves
gauze
Loosen the large thumbscrew on top of the retaining lever and slide the
retaining lever backward.
CAUTION! Do not pinch tubing when moving the retaining lever back.
Thumbscrew
Valve
Motor
Retaining
Lever
Valve Body
240883B-171a
3-98
2006/12
Maintaining
Lift the valve motor off the valve body and set it aside.
Valve
Motor
240883B-173a
5
6
Gently pull the white valve body straight up and off the pump to expose
the lip seal.
With a glove or paper towel, unscrew the lip seal and washer from the top
of the pump piston and discard them.
Lip Seal
235061A-138
7
8
2006/12
Place the new washer onto the top threads of the piston and then screw on
the new lip seal. Hand-tighten completely.
Clean the inside of the valve body with a gauze pad lightly moistened
with water or a lint-free towel.
3-99
Maintaining
Lubricate the outside rim of the lip seal with Krytox grease. Place two
pinhead-sized drops of grease on your gloved forefinger. Gently rub a
light coating around the outer edge of the lip seal. Do not apply it to the
entire surface. Using the same gloved finger, lubricate the inside surface
of the valve body.
10 Reinstall the white valve body by pushing it straight down on the piston.
11 Press down firmly on the encoder assembly and ensure that it springs
back with a click sound. If it doesnt, call the Technical Assistance Center
to order a new motor.
9
Valve
Motor
Encoder
Assembly
Clean Inside
Valve Body
Retaining Lever
240883B-173b
12 Reinstall the valve motor onto the valve body, ensuring that the wires are
toward the rear of the instrument. Be sure the motor is seated firmly on
the valve body.
13 Slide the retaining lever on the pump forward over the assembly.
14
Getting to the Pump
Prime Menu screen...
From the Operating Menu,
press:
F4: System Prep
F7: Pump Prime
15
16
17
18
CAUTION! Do not pinch tubing when moving the retaining lever forward.
Tighten the large thumbscrew on top of the pump assembly. Check that
you can turn the valve motor with slight resistance. If you cannot turn the
motor, the thumbscrew is too tight; if there is no resistance, the thumbscrew is too loose.
Press Pause to restart the IMT sampling system.
From the Pump Prime Menu screen, prime the monopump by moving the
cursor to the Cycles field, typing 3 for the number of prime cycles to be
performed, and pressing Enter. Then press F5: IMT Mono Pump.
For non-HM instruments, run a System Check.
Replace the QuikLYTE sensor by following the entire procedure in
Module 2: Using, Replacing the QuikLYTE Integrated Multisensor.
CAUTION! You MUST replace the QuikLYTE sensor after replacing the
monopump piston lip seal.
19 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-100
2006/12
Maintaining
Loosen the large thumbscrew on top of the retaining lever, slide the
retaining lever backwards, and lift the valve motor off the valve body.
CAUTION! Do not pinch tubing when moving the retaining lever back.
Thumbscrew
Valve
Motor
Retaining
Lever
Valve Body
240883B-171a
2006/12
3-101
Maintaining
Using a 3/32" Allen wrench, remove two screws and slide the sensor and
its bracket out of the assembly.
Remove
These
Screws
240883B-159
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
3-102
Pump Rotary
Valve Sensor
2006/12
screwdriver
lens paper
Maintaining
Raise probe
out of drain
A216127Max
Using the screwdriver, loosen the three captive screws that secure the R2
reagent arm to the instrument. Manually move the R2 arm counterclockwise to access and loosen captive screw number 3.
Carefully lift the R2 reagent arm and lay it aside. You do not need to
disconnect any tubing or electrical connectors.
(REAGENT ARM IN
THIS ILLUSTRATION
IS AT 12:00)
A2161127-152J
2006/12
3-103
Maintaining
Carefully lift the edge of the filter and remove it from the wheel. Holding
the filter by its sides, clean both surfaces with lens paper. If necessary,
use water to clean the filter.
CAUTION! Do not use paper towels to clean optical filters; they will
damage the filters by scratching them.
715M/321Max
Reinsert the filter into its correct position in the filter wheel. The arrow
on the side of the filter should point up. Then wipe the top surface of the
optical filter with lens paper. Also wipe the top of any other filters you
may have inadvertently touched while inserting the filter.
WARNING: Make sure that the filter is replaced with the arrow pointing up
or it will not function properly.
E101616-221
Arrow on filter
should point up
7
8
3-104
Position the R2 reagent arm alignment slot over the alignment pin in the
instrument baseplate. Tighten the captive screws.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
2006/12
Maintaining
Filter #
Wavelength
Methods
340 nm
ALC, ALT, AMON, AMPH, AST, BARB, BENZ, BUN, C3, C4,
CK, CKMB, COC, CRBM, CRP, EXTC, GENT, GLU, GLUC,
HA1C, IGA, IGG, IGM, LA, LDH, LIDO, MALB, METH, MPA,
NAPA, OPI, PCP, PHNO, PHOS, PROC, PTN, RCRP, T4, THC,
THEO, TOBR, TRIG, TRNF, TU, VALP, VANC
383 nm
ALC, AMON, BUN, GLU, GLUC, LA, LDH, PALB, T4, TRIG, TU
405 nm
452 nm
CHOL, HDL
510 nm
540 nm
ALB, ALDL, CA, CHOL, DBI, DBIL, HDL, LI, TBI, TBIL, TP
577 nm
600 nm
700 nm
10
293 nm
URCA
* HM methods.
2006/12
3-105
Maintaining
screwdriver
Raise probe
out of drain
A216127Max
Using the screwdriver, loosen the three captive screws that secure the R2
reagent arm to the instrument. Manually move the R2 arm counterclockwise to access and loosen captive screw number 3.
Carefully lift the R2 reagent arm and lay it aside. You do not need to
disconnect any tubing or electrical connectors.
(REAGENT ARM IN
THIS ILLUSTRATION
IS AT 12:00)
A2161127-152J
3-106
2006/12
Maintaining
Unplug P/J 34C. Remove the screw in the center of the S1 sensor and
remove the sensor from the instrument.
CAUTION! Be careful not to touch, scratch, or damage any of the optical
filters during this procedure.
6
7
2006/12
3-107
Maintaining
R1
Reagent
Arm
300178A-027
6
7
Install the new photometer home sensor by reversing the previous steps.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
8 Perform steps 1 through 6 of the Photometer Alignment procedure in
Module 4: Aligning.
9 Perform a System Check and your Daily QC.
10 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-108
2006/12
scissors
Maintaining
3
4
5
Position the new roll of paper in the printer so that the paper feeds off the
front (or top) of the roll.
Lock the new roll of paper in place by pushing the locking pins on both
sides of the bar toward the paper and then up toward the printer.
Slide the paper up into the printer until it catches and automatically feeds
itself through the printer.
2006/12
240883B-31
6
7
8
Maintaining
screwdriver
3/32" Allen wrench
11/32" wrench
1 With the system in Standby, go to the Pump Prime Menu screen to turn
off the sampling system.
2 Open both front instrument doors, press the pump assembly release
button, and pull the pump assembly toward you.
3-110
2006/12
Maintaining
3 Remove the plastic shield on the rear of the pump assembly by loosening
the captive screw at the top of the shield.
A
B
D
E
2006/12
3-111
Maintaining
4 Locate the lmit switch or sensor to be replaced and disconnect its connector. If a limit switch has a small wedge which is used to tighten the limit
switch into its connector, remove the wedge using your fingers.
c. Position the optical sensor bracket in the area where the switch was
located. Install the bracket using the hex screws and lockwashers.
If removing an optical sensor:
a. Use the 5/64 hex wrench to remove the hex screw holding the sensor
to its bracket. Remove and discard the sensor.
3-112
2006/12
Measure gap
using this end
of folded paper
P200717-43
Maintaining
b. Install the optical sensor on the bracket using the 2-56 x .25 hex screw.
Do not overtighten the screw - you could damage the sensor. Do not
replace the plastic shield yet.
c. Plug the optical sensor into the connector.
6 Check the syringe gap between the bottom of the syringe and the top of
the metal plunger using a folded piece (equal to four thicknesses) of
printer paper. This will set a gap of 0.0050.010 inches. If the gap setting
is correct, you should be able to just barely slide this paper between the
bottom of the syringe and the top of the metal plunger (see illustration).
If the setting is correct, skip to step 15.
If the setting needs adjustment, continue with step 9.,
Plunger
Slip Folded
Printer Paper
into this Gap
Syringe
Foot of
Plunger
100 L Syringe
Gap
500 L Syringe
2500 L Syringe
7 Manually turn the pump lead screw in the direction shown in the illustration below until it cannot be turned any further.
2006/12
3-113
Maintaining
9 Turn the adjustment screw until the syringe indicator light (LED) on the
front panel of the appropriate Motor Control Board in the card cage just
lights.
Syringe
LED
Sample 2500 L
Slot 3
CR2A
Sample 100 L
Slot 3
CR2C
R2 2500 L
Slot 3
CR3A
R2 500 L
Slot 3
CR3C
R1 2500 L
Slot 3
CR5A
R1 500 L
Slot 3
CR5C
Diluent
Slot 4
CR6C
HM Wash
Slot 5
CR5C
3-114
2006/12
Maintaining
A
B
D
E
2006/12
3-115
Maintaining
4
5
Solenoid
valveBB, E, F
Solenoid Valve
Label should
Should Appear
label
appear
Upside Down
upside down
Priming a pump:
1 From the Operating Menu,
press:
F4: System Prep
F7: Pump Prime
2 Move the cursor to the
Cycles field and type 6 for
the number of cycles to be
performed.
3 Press the appropriate
function key to begin
priming the pump for the
solenoid valve that was
replaced.
3-116
P200717-92
7
8
Using the Pump Prime Menu screen, prime the appropriate pump.
While priming, check for any tubing leaks. Continue priming the pump
until all the air is out of its tubing.
Perform a System Check and your Daily QC.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet
2006/12
Maintaining
4
5
2006/12
Remove the thumbscrew from the bottom bracket of the syringe. Use the
needlenose pliers to keep the syringe plunger from turning as you unscrew this thumbscrew.
CAUTION! Use the needlenose pliers on the metal portion of the syringe
plunger. Do not use pliers on the glass portion of the syringe.
Press the pump assembly release button and pull the pump assembly
toward you.
Remove the plastic shield on the rear of the pump assembly by loosening
the captive screw at the top of the shield.
3-117
Maintaining
Manually turn the syringes pump lead screw in the direction shown in
the illustration below until it cannot be turned any further.
Using the 7/64" Allen wrench, remove the screw from the top bracket of
the syringe.
Fit the new syringe into the upper bracket and loosely tighten the 7/64"
Allen screw in the upper bracket.
Pull the plunger down until it is snug in the bottom syringe bracket, then
completely tighten the thumbscrew. Use needlenose pliers to keep the
syringe plunger from turning as you tighten the thumbscrew with your
fingers.
8
9
Priming a pump:
1 From the Operating Menu,
press:
F4: System Prep
F7: Pump Prime
2 Move the cursor to the
Cycles field and type 6 for
the number of cycles to be
performed.
3 Press the appropriate
function key to begin
priming the pump for the
syringe that was replaced.
3-118
CAUTION! Use the pliers on the metal portion of the syringe plunger.
Do not use pliers on the glass portion of the syringe.
10 Completely tighten the 7/64" Allen screw at the top of the syringe
bracket.
11 On the Pump Prime screen, move the cursor to the Cycles field and
type 6.
12 Press the appropriate function key to begin priming the pump for the
syringe that was replaced.
2006/12
Measure gap
using this end
of folded paper
P200717-43
Maintaining
13 Check the syringe gap between the bottom of the syringe and the top of
the metal plunger using a folded piece (equal to four thicknesses) of
printer paper. This will set a gap of 0.0050.010". If the gap setting is
correct, you should be able to just barely slide this paper between the
bottom of the syringe and the top of the metal plunger (see illustration).
If the gap setting is correct, skip to step 21.
If a gap adjustment is required, continue with step 14.
Plunger
Slip Folded
Printer Paper
into this Gap
Syringe
Foot of
Plunger
100 L Syringe
Gap
500 L Syringe
2500 L Syringe
14 Manually turn the pump lead screw in the direction shown in the illustration below until it cannot be turned any further.
2006/12
3-119
Maintaining
15 Using the 11/32" wrench, loosen the locking nut on the black moving
block .
16 Place the 3/32" Allen wrench in the bottom of the adjustment screw and
lower this screw until it no longer touches the actuator arm of the pump
syringe. Then turn the adjustment screw in the opposite direction until the
syringe indicator light (LED) on the front panel of the appropriate Motor
Control Board in the card cage just lights.
Syringe
Priming a pump:
1 From the Operating Menu,
press:
F4: System Prep
F7: Pump Prime
2 Move the cursor to the
Cycles field and type 6 for
the number of cycles to be
performed.
3 Press the appropriate
function key to begin
priming the pump for the
syringe that was replaced.
3-120
LED
Sample 2500 L
Slot 3
CR2A
Sample 500 L
Slot 3
CR2C
R2 2500 L
Slot 3
CR3A
R2 500 L
Slot 3
CR3C
R1 2500 L
Slot 3
CR5A
R1 500 L
Slot 3
CR5C
HM Wash
Slot 5
CR5C
17 When the LED for the syringe just lights, raise the adjustment screw
further by turning it an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
18 Prime the appropriate pump.
19 After priming the pump, check the gap setting again.
If the gap setting is correct, skip to step 21.
If further adjustment is required, use the 3/32" Allen wrench to turn the
adjustment screw as needed and then press Reset and recheck the gap.
20 Using the 3/32" Allen wrench to keep the adjustment screw from turning,
tighten the locking nut using the 11/32" wrench.
After tightening this nut, perform another prime and then make a final
check of the gap to ensure that it did not move while you tightened the
locking nut. Then continue with step 21.
2006/12
Maintaining
21 Replace the plastic shield on the rear of the pump assembly and close the
assembly.
22 Prime the pump.
23 Perform a System Check and your Daily QC.
24 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
3-121
Maintaining
screwdriver
3/32" Allen wrench
4
5
Move the probe away from its reagent drain (by turning the top shaft of
the R1 reagent arm or manually moving the R2 reagent arm counterclockwise) until you can easily access the sensor.
Disconnect P/J 20C for R1 (or P/J 80D for R2).
Using a screwdriver, remove the screw that holds the radial home sensor
to the reagent arm and remove the sensor.
Install the new sensor by reversing the previous steps. Position the R1
sensor with the yellow and black wires at the top.
7 Close the reagent lid and press the Pause key to restart the sampling
system.
8 Perform all the reagent arm alignments for the probe on which the sensor
was replaced. Refer to the R1 (or R2) Reagent Probe Alignments
procedure in Module 4: Aligning as necessary.
9 Perform a System Check.
10 Document the replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-122
2006/12
Maintaining
Move the probe away from its reagent drain (by turning the top shaft of
the R1 reagent arm or manually moving the R2 reagent arm counterclockwise) until you can easily access the sensor.
Disconnect P/J 20D for R1 (P/J 80B for R2).
Using a screwdriver, remove the screw that holds the vertical sensor to
the sensor housing bracket and remove the sensor from the reagent arm.
6 Install the new sensor by reversing the previous steps. Make sure the
sensor cable is placed into its cable holder.
7 Close the reagent lid and press the Pause key to restart the sampling
system.
8 Perform all the reagent arm alignments for the probe on which the sensor
was replaced. Refer to the R1 (or R2) Reagent Probe Alignments
procedure in Module 4: Aligning as necessary.
9 Perform a System Check.
10 Document the replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
3-123
Maintaining
4
5
3-124
Move the probe away from its reagent drain (by turning the top shaft of
the R1 reagent arm or manually moving the R2 reagent arm counterclockwise) until you can easily access the sensor.
Disconnect P/J 32D.
Using a screwdriver, remove the screw that holds the sensor to its bracket
and remove the sensor from the instrument.
Separate the metal clip from the old sensor and place it on the new sensor.
2006/12
2006/12
Maintaining
7
8
3-125
Maintaining
3-126
Move the probe away from its reagent drain (by turning the top shaft of
the R1 reagent arm or manually moving the R2 reagent arm counterclockwise) until you can easily access its reagent probe tip.
Place a paper towel under the probe to prevent anything from falling into
a reagent cartridge while you are removing the probe tip.
2006/12
Ratchet Wrench
Offset Wrench
Maintaining
Open-end Wrench
2006/12
3-127
Maintaining
6 Insert a new reagent probe tip into a new probe tip nut and then screw the
new reagent probe tip onto the reagent probe body finger-tight.
Reagent Probe
Nut
302263A-48
3-128
7 Completely tighten the new reagent probe tip using either the 5/16"
open-end wrench and offset wrench or the 5/16" open-end wrench and
ratchet wrench.
Using the ratchet wrench to tighten the probe tip:
Place the 5/16" wrench on the reagent probe body to keep it from turning.
With the OFF marking on the ratchet wrench facing UP (so you can
read it), slide the 1/4" opening of the ratchet wrench up the reagent probe
and onto the probe tip nut. Turn the ratchet wrench counterclockwise
completely to tighten the probe tip and nut to the probe body.
8 Align the reagent probe. See Module 4: Aligning.
9 Close the reagent lid and press Pause to restart the sampling system.
10 Go to the System Counters screen, move the cursor box to the appropriate
reagent probe tip field, and press Enter to change the field from NO to
YES. Then press F1: Store Changes.
11 Prime the reagent pump.
12 Perform your Daily QC.
13 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
screwdriver
9/64" Allen wrench
5/32" Allen wrench
Maintaining
Remove These
Tubing Clamps
Remove Bar
300177A-05
Using the 9/64" Allen wrench, loosen the four screws that secure the
drive motor to its bracket and slide the drive motor toward the front of the
instrument to disengage its gears.
Loosen Motor
Screws and Slide
Motor Toward Front
of Instrument
Allen
Screws
Motor
240883B-117
2006/12
3-129
Maintaining
7
8
9
3-130
2006/12
Maintaining
2006/12
3-131
Maintaining
3 Open the middle instrument door and remove the reagent tubing from the
left port of the reagent arm 500-L syringe by pulling on the knurled
fitting. Then unscrew the knurled fitting from the tubing. Save this
knurled fitting because you will be installing it on the new tubing later in
this procedure.
Knurled
Fitting
500 L
Syringe
3-132
2006/12
Maintaining
Disconnect the reagent tubing from the reagent probe by pulling on the
probe knurled fitting. Then unscrew the knurled fitting from the tubing
and pull the tubing through the spring guide. Save this knurled fitting
because you will be installing it on the new tubing later in this procedure.
Spring
Guide
Knurled
Fitting
240883B-118
2006/12
Remove the tubing from any other tubing clamps or guides as necessary
and pull the tubing up through the instrument. Discard the tubing.
3-133
Maintaining
Start from the reagent probe and thread the new tubing through the
instrument down to the reagent pump. Thread through any tubing clamps
and guides as necessary.
R2
Tubing
Spring
Clamp
Tubing
Guide
Tubing
Clamps
R1
Tubing
P200717-94
3-134
2006/12
Maintaining
Attach the knurled fitting removed from the old tubing in step 3 to the
pump end of the new tubing by screwing the fitting on by hand until
approximately 1/16" of the tubing extends past the fitting. Then press the
tubing onto the 500-L reagent syringe fitting.
Install the new reagent tubing through the spring guide and onto the
reagent probe. Position the reagent tubing through the spring guide as
shown in the illustrations below.
To install the reagent tubing through the spring guide:
a Pull the tubing through the spring guide to position the black wrapping (or stamped marking) as shown below.
Knurled
Fitting
Spring
Guide
Metal
Fitting
2.25 Inches
302263A-37
2006/12
b Attach the knurled fitting removed in step 4 to the reagent probe end
of the tubing as described in step 7 above. Then press the tubing
completely onto the metal fitting on the reagent probe.
9 Close the instrument doors, close the sample and reagent area lids, and
press the Pause key to restart the sampling system.
10 From the Pump Prime Menu screen, prime the reagent pump by moving
the cursor to the Cycles field, typing 3 for the number of prime cycles to
be performed, and pressing the Enter key. Then press the function key
for the reagent pump that had its tubing replaced.
Check the reagent tubing for leaks while the system is priming.
11 Perform a System Check.
12 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-135
Maintaining
screwdriver
4
Another way to determine
whether the board is
completely seated...
The faceplate of the board
should be flush with all the
other boards.
3-136
5
6
Use the square handles on the board faceplate to pull the board halfway
out of its slot and then firmly reseat it. You will detect a click or pop
when the board seats completely into its connector.
Tighten the two captive screws.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
2006/12
2006/12
Maintaining
3-137
Maintaining
3
Wrenches you can use
Ratchet Wrench
Offset Wrench
Open-end Wrench
3-138
2006/12
Maintaining
Insert a new sample probe tip into a new probe tip nut and screw it onto
the sample probe body finger-tight.
Sample Probe
Nut
302263A-48a
2006/12
Completely tighten the new sample probe tip using either the 5/16" openend wrench and offset wrench or the 5/16" open-end wrench and ratchet
wrench.
To use the ratchet wrench to tighten the probe tip:
Place the 5/16" wrench on the sample probe body to keep it from turning.
With the OFF marking on the ratchet wrench facing UP (so you can
read it), slide the 1/4" opening of the ratchet wrench up the reagent probe
and onto the probe tip nut. Turn the ratchet wrench counterclockwise
completely to tighten the probe tip and nut to the probe body .
6 Close the sample and reagent lids and press the Pause key to restart the
sampling system.
7 Go to the System Counters screen, move the cursor box to the Sample
Probe Tip field, and press Enter to change the field from NO to YES.
Then press F1: Store Changes.
8 Prime the sample pump.
9 Perform the "Sample Probe Alignments" procedures in Module 4: Aligning.
10 Perform your Daily QC.
11 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-139
Maintaining
1
2
3
3-140
With the instrument in Standby, press the Pause key to stop the sampling
system, and then raise the sample and reagent area lids.
Open the middle instrument door and pull the sample tubing off the left
port of the 100-L syringe.
Remove the plastic fitting from the end of this tubing. It will need to be
placed onto the new sample tubing later in this procedure.
2006/12
Maintaining
2006/12
Remove the sample tubing from the instrument by pulling it off its
sample probe connection and pulling this tubing up through the instrument.
5 Press the black sheathed end of the new sample tubing onto its sample
probe connection.
6 Route the other end of the sample tubing under the ultrasonic cable cover
and down through the corrugated black plastic conduit until it comes out
the opening above the 100-L syringe.
7 Attach the plastic fitting onto the sample tubing and press the tubing onto
the left port of the 100-L syringe.
8 Close the sample and reagent lids and press the Pause key to turn on the
sampling system.
9 From the Pump Prime Menu screen, prime the sample pump by moving
the cursor to the Cycles field, typing 3 for the number of prime cycles to
be performed, and pressing Enter. Then press F2: Sampler.
Check the sample tubing for leaks while the system is priming.
10 Perform a System Check and your Daily QC.
11 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-141
Maintaining
302045A-149
5
6
7
8
9
Using the 5/64" Allen wrench, remove the screw that holds the sensor to
the bracket.
Install the new sample wheel home sensor onto the bracket.
Install the sample wheel home sensor and bracket in the instrument.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
Perform the Bar Code Scanner Alignment procedure in Module 4:
Aligning.
WARNING: Failure to perform the Bar Code Scanner Alignment procedure could result in misidentification of bar code sample
tubes.
10 Perform the IMT Probe to Segment Outer and Segment Inner Alignments
(inner and outer) of the IMT Probe Alignments procedure in Module 4:
Aligning.
11 Perform the Sample Probe to Cup Alignment of the Sample Probe
Alignments procedure in Module 4: Aligning.
12 Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-142
2006/12
Maintaining
IMT Sample
Handler
Rotational
Sensor
231257A-89-S
2006/12
IMT Sample
Handler
Vertical
Sensor
231257A-90-SG
3-143
Maintaining
screwdriver
2
3
Lower the cuvette thermal chamber. See Lowering and Raising the
Thermal Chamber in this module.
Unplug source lamp connector P/J 72B located inside the cuvette thermal
chamber.
WARNING: Source lamp assembly may be hot.
Loosen the two captive thumbscrews that hold the source lamp assembly
in place and remove the source lamp assembly.
P/J72B
Screws
8
9
3-144
Source Lamp
Assembly
715M-320(L)r
2006/12
Maintaining
10 Recalibrate the following methods: C3, C4, CCRP, CRBM, CRP, GENT,
HA1C, IGA, IGG, IGM, LIDO, MALB, MPA, NAPA, PALB, PHNO,
PROC, PTN, RCRP, THEO, TOBR, TRNF, VALP, VANC. Their
performance can be affected by a new source lamp.
WARNING: If you do not recalibrate these methods, you could obtain
erroneous results.
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
dark calibration
reference:
sample (outer on):
sample (outer off):
lamp: HIGH
low calib level:
high calib level:
8929.98 Hz
9030.86 Hz
9029.11 Hz
nm
293
340
383
405
452
510
540
577
600
700
mAU offset
315
325
312
305
312
311
313
309
309
311
F6:
F7:
F8:
XP3-125
2
3
4
5
6
7
2006/12
From the Photometer Alignment and Calibration screen, press F1: Dark
Calib.
If the instrument has been on for more than 30 minutes and the cuvette
temperature icon is not appearing at the top the screen, answer the message with a Y. The dark calibration takes approximately 30 seconds.
When the dark calibration is complete, press F2: Lamp Calib.
When the Time on HIGH field on the screen is 30 minutes, answer the
message with a Y. The lamp calibration takes approximately 30 seconds.
Press Exit.
Complete any remaining steps in the Replacing the Source Lamp
procedure.
3-145
Maintaining
screwdriver
9/64 hex key
5
6
7
8
3-146
Install the new top seal element but do not completely tighten the two
mounting screws, and reconnect P/J 33B.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
Restore power as indicated in the Controlled Power Shutdown procedure.
Continue with the Aligning the Top Seal Element procedure on the
next page.
2006/12
Maintaining
Solenoid
Solenoid
Adjustment Screw
Pivot Arm
Pivot Arm
Mounting Screws
Silicone Ring
Capstan
Nip Roller
Top Seal Element
Idler Block
2
3
4
5
2006/12
3-147
Maintaining
Wrap the cuvettes around the capstan and push the nip roller lever into
place.
WARNING: Do not place your fingers near the toothed gear of the capstan
drive during this step. This is a potential pinch point area.
Wait until the cuvettes are away from the capstan.
3-148
2006/12
screwdriver
tie wrap
needlenose pliers
Maintaining
2006/12
Unlock the U-seal solenoid assembly by pulling its curved locking bar to
the right; then move this assembly to the left away from the cuvette ring.
3-149
Maintaining
Observe how the cable is looped around the tie wrap. With needlenose
pliers, break the tie wrap and remove it.
Using the screwdriver, gently pry the U-seal element off its metal frame.
U-Seal
Element
Pry Here
240883B-123
3-150
2006/12
Maintaining
10 Insert the tie wrap throough the tie mount on the cuvette arm.
11
12
13
14
15
16
2006/12
Insert the end of the tie wrap through the head of the tie wrap and form a
loop about 3/4-inch in diameter.
Pass the P/J 13L cable through the tie wrap loop and wrap it around once.
Connect P/J13L. Tighten the tie wrap around the cable enough to hold but
not pinch it. Cut off the excess tie wrap.
Reposition the U-seal solenoid near the cuvette ring and push the curved
locking bar into place.
Position the alignment bar and tighten its thumbscrew.
Lower the bar code reader.
Close the instrument lids.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
3-151
Maintaining
300177A-09
Filter
Cover
300177A-10
4
5
3-152
Remove the old felt filter off of the vacuum pump fitting and replace it.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
2006/12
Maintaining
Vacuum LED
Follow the in-the-box replacement procedure that comes with
the switch.
Vacuum Switch
Pressure Switch
Connectors
XP3_131_01
3
Electrical connector designations...
Use the needlenose pliers to remove two connectors from the switch.
CAUTION! It is important to replace the connectors correctly on the new
switch. Refer to the illustration below.
N.O.
N.C.
COM
N.C.
N.O.
COM
Vacuum Switch
Connections
Pressure Switch
Connections
XP131b_01
2006/12
3-153
Maintaining
Use the needlenose pliers to open the tubing clamp behind the switch by
squeezing the prongs of this clamp and pulling the tubing from the rear of
the switch.
Use the 5/64" Allen wrench to remove four screws and remove the
switch.
To determine proper
switch operation ...
After restoring instrument
power:
The vacuum switch LED
should be lit whenever the
vacuum is >3 in. Hg.
The pressure switch LED
should be lit whenever the
pressure gauge reading is 15
psi.
3-154
2006/12
paper towels
Maintaining
To P/J 1A
P200717-19
6
7
8
Loosen the collar ring on the cap of the water bottle (the collar ring turns
without moving the cap), remove the dip tube assembly, and place it in
the spare water bottle.
Reconnect P/J 1A, place the water bottle back in the instrument. The
water bottle should begin filling with water.
Wait until the water bottle is filled, then prime all the system pumps.
Document this replacement on the Instrument Log sheet.
Clean the used water bottle. See Cleaning the Water Bottle earlier in
this module.
2006/12
3-155
Maintaining
POSITION
SAMPLE ID
SAMPLE FLUID
SAMPLER CHECK
ABS
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
240883B-003a
2
3
2
3
If a mean or standard
deviation IS NOT
reported...
System Check tests were
aborted for the reagent
systems or sampler system.
Go to the Error Log screen and
resolve any error messages
and rerun the System Check.
To go to the Error Log screen,
from the Operating Menu,
press:
F5: Process Ctrl
F6: Error Log
3-156
4
5
6
Reagent #1
(R1 Reagent Arm)
Reagent #2
(R2 Reagent Arm)
Sampler
HM Wash
IMT Dil
(non-HM)
Maintaining
Decontamination Procedure
Perform this procedure only if your instrument is equipped with the Heterogeneous Module (HM) and you are advised by a Dade Behring Inc. representative. It takes about 50 minutes to complete these steps.
1 Disable the water system supply:
a. Go to the Operating Menu and press F6: System Config
b. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor down to Water In
c. Press Enter twice to change from plumbed to manual.
2 Prepare decontamination solution:
a. Refer to the following table to determine the amount of bleach to add:
IF % of Sodium Hypochlorite (bleach)
in the product IS:
THEN ADD:
5.25
500 mL
Ultra Clorox
6.00
438 mL
Other
8.00
328 mL
Other
10.00
263 mL
Other
12.00
219 mL
Other
15.00
175 mL
Bleach Product
2006/12
b. Fill a water bottle with deionized water, and then add the required
volume of bleach. Cover, then agitate the bottle to mix the solution.
c. Fill an empty chemistry wash bottle with the solution and pour half of
the remaining solution in another water bottle.
Decontaminate the water and chemistry wash system:
a. Install a water bottle containing the bleach solution, then agitate
gently to wash the inside of the bottle, the bottom of the lid, and the
water bottle float switch assembly.
b. Install the chemistry wash bottle containing the bleach solution.
Gently agitate the bottle to clean the bottom of the lid, and the bottle
float switch assembly.
c. Display the Operating Menu screen and press F4: System Prep, then
F7: Pump Prime.
d. Set CYCLES: to 10.
e. Press F1: Prime Water to pump bleach solution through the system.
f. Press F6: HM
g. Set CYCLES: to 10.
h. Press F1: HM Wash Pump to pump bleach solution through the
chemistry wash system. DO THIS STEP 3 TIMES.
3-157
Maintaining
4
5
Allow the bleach solution to remain in the lines for at least 30 minutes.
Rinse the water and chemistry wash systems:
a. Remove the water and chemistry wash bottle lids and float switch
assemblies and set them into spare bottles (or on a clean paper towel
if a bottle is not available).
b. Discard each bottle's contents and rinse each bottle 3 times with
deionized water.
c. Fill the bottles with deionized water and install the lid assemblies.
d. Agitate each bottle gently to rinse the bottom of the lids and the float
switch assemblies.
e. Cycle water through the system as described in step 3, e, f and h.
f. Remove the bottles again as described in step (a) and (b) above and
discard the contents.
g. Rinse the water bottle one more time with deionized water.
6 Reassemble the water and chemistry wash systems:
a. Install the water bottle and lid assembly on the instrument.
b. Change the Water In back to plumbed.
1) Go to the Operating Menu and press F6: System Config
2) Use the arrow keys to move the cursor down to Water In
3) Press Enter to change from manual to plumbed.
c. Allow the system to fill the water bottle.
d. Install a new Chemistry Wash bottle and update the count.
e. Perform another system prime as described in Step 3, e, f and h. (Set
each prime cycle back to the original number.)
7 From the System Counters screen, select the Clean Probe routine. Condition the photometric sample probe by using a normal serum sample for
the fluid.
8 Run your Daily QC.
3-158
2006/12
Aligning
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
2006/12
4-1
Aligning
4-2
2006/12
Aligning
Alignment Offsets
Each component is set during manufacture to a specific position. To compensate for slight manufacturing variations each component, your systems
components are corrected to manufacturing specifications using offset
values determined during your alignment of the component. This offset value
can be positive, negative, or zero.
The alignment file is
longer than one screen...
Use the PgDn and PgUp keys
on the keyboard to see more
of this file.
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
ALIGNMENT FILE
ALIGNMENT POINT
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R1
R1
R1
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
reagent
OFFSET
arm
probe to plate
probe to cartridge
carriage to cartridge
carriage
arm phase
probe to plate
probe to cartridge
carriage to cartridge
carriage to drain
0
-15
-35
24
-15
0
-12
-29
19
0
F1:
F2:
F3:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8: ACCEPT
225156A-304
2006/12
4-3
Aligning
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
PRIMARY TUBE
PED TUBE
SSC
Move the probe until the nut is at the top of the tube.
UP / DOWN
1000
100
1 [outer]
26 [inner]
27 [interval]
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F6:
F8: ACCEPT
184543A-323a
2
Which is position #1 on the
sample wheel?
It is marked on the inside of the
sample area.
To stop an alignment...
Press the space bar at any time.
4
5
4-4
(You only need to perform this alignment if you are using barcode
labeled tubes.) With the instrument in Standby, from the Sample Probe
Max Depth screen, press F5: Bar Code Align.
Place barcode labeled tubes in positions #5 and #6 of an empty segment
and place this segment in position 1 of the sample wheel. Make sure the
barcode labels are good quality, properly positioned on the tube, and
centered in the slot of the segment.
Press Enter. The system will automatically scan the barcode labels and
determine the alignment values. The outer segment is scanned first, then
the inner. This takes about two minutes to complete. If the following
message is displayed: mechanical align inner barcode reader clockwise, disregard and continue with step 4.
The new alignment values will be displayed on the lower portion of the
display screen as shown on the screen on the previous page.
Compare the values on the screen to the alignment limits in 5a and 5b:
a) Calculate the SUM of the [outer] and [inner] values on the screen:
(Outer) + (Inner) = _____ include the + and - signs,
e.g., (1) + (-26) = -25
This SUM must be equal to or more positive than -30.
(e.g., -30, -29, -28 ... = Pass, while -31, -32, -33 ... = Fail)
2006/12
Aligning
b) The Interval value (from the lower right corner of the display screen)
must be equal to or more positive than -15.
(e.g., -15, -14, -13 ... = Pass, while -16, -17, -18 ... = Fail)
c) If both alignments pass, skip to step 6.
If either of the above alignment limits fails...
d) Check for proper bar code label placement on the tubes, ensure that
the label is visible through the slot in the segment, and then press
F5: Bar Code Align to rerun the alignment. Compare the new
alignment values with the alignment limits noted in steps 5a and 5b
above.
If both alignments pass, skip to step 6.
If either alignment fails, continue with steps 5e, 5f, and 5g.
e) Loosen the two screws that attach the inner barcode scanner bracket
to the baseplate and rotate the scanner bracket fully clockwise.
f) Retighten the screws and then press F5: Bar Code Align to rerun the
alignment.
NOTE:
When the alignment is
complete, disregard any
message to mechanically
align the barcode reader.
2006/12
300177A-11
g) Compare the new alignment values with the alignment limits noted in
steps 5a and 5b above.
If both alignments Pass, continue with step 6.
If the alignment fails, call the Technical Assistance Center.
Press Exit and follow the messages to remove the bar code labeled
sample tubes in segment #1, positions #5 and #6.
4-5
Aligning
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
CUVETTE ALIGNMENT
PRESS F1 TO INDEX WHEEL
INDEX # 0
F1: START
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
225156A-305
2
3
Plunger
Cuvette
Diaphragm
240883B-81
4-6
2006/12
Aligning
Check that the cuvette ring sensor is fully seated by pushing up on the
sensor.
5
6
Insert Allen
Wrench Here
8
9
2006/12
Verify the alignment by pressing F1: Start and visually checking the
position of the cuvette ring. Repeat step 6 if necessary. When the cuvette
ring is aligned, press Exit.
Close the reagent lid.
Perform the Photometer Alignment portion of the Photometer Alignment and Calibration procedure in this module.
4-7
Aligning
HM Module Alignments
This procedure includes alignments of parts on the HM module. To completely align the HM module, you will also need to perform the following
three alignments:
IMT probe to IMT probe cleaner bottle
Sample arm to incubate wheel
R2 reagent arm to incubate wheel
The above three alignments align other parts of the Dimension RxL Max
clinical chemistry system to the HM module. See their alignment procedures
later in this module.
The HM module component alignments consist of the following:
Incubate and Wash Wheel Alignments:
incubate wheel to transfer opening
wash wheel to incubate wheel
wash probes to wash wheel, and
Vessel Transfer Shuttle Alignments:
vessel transfer shuttle to incubate wheel
vessel transfer shuttle to wash wheel
vessel transfer shuttle to load
The three incubate and wash wheel alignments must be performed in the
order that they are listed on the screen.
All six alignments listed above must be checked/performed to align the HM
module components. Use message prompts as they appear to help you with
each alignment.
1
2
With the instrument in Standby, raise the sample and reagent lids.
Go to the HM Module Alignments screen.
Press F7: DIAGNOSTICS
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
HM MODULE ALIGNMENTS
INCUBATE & WASH WHEEL ALIGNMENTS (should be done in this order) :
incubate wheel to transfer opening
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F6:
F8: ACCEPT
300178A-005
4-8
2006/12
Aligning
If the alignment is correct, move the cursor down to the Wash Wheel to
Incubate Wheel field and continue with the next step.
Alignment
Incubate Wheel to
Transfer Opening
300178A-021
2006/12
4-9
Aligning
If the alignment is correct, move the cursor down to the Wash Probes to
Wash Wheel field and continue with the next step.
Wash Wheel to
Incubate Wheel
300178A-022
4-10
2006/12
5
If a wash probe tip is
not over any portion
of the white alignment
dot
1 Use a 3/32" Allen
wrench to loosen the
two screws that secure
the wash probe holder
to the wash probe
platform.
2 Move the top of the
wash probe until its tip is
within the white
alignment marks.
3 While keeping the tip
from moving, tighten the
two screws.
4 Press F7: Check Align
and check the wash
probe tip alignment to
the white dot.
Aligning
Alignment
Wash Probes to
Wash Wheel
300178A-023
2006/12
4-11
Aligning
Depress the vessel shuttle guide solenoid valve plunger to manually lower
the shuttle guide to the reaction vessel and then visually determine if the
guides are centered around the reaction vessel.
If the alignment is correct, move the cursor down to the Vessel Transfer
Shuttle to Wash Wheel field and continue with the next step.
The edges of the vessel guide on the end of the vessel transfer
shuttle are centered around the top of the vessel in the
incubate wheel.
Vessel Is Centered
Within Guide
300178A-024
4-12
2006/12
Aligning
Depress the vessel shuttle guide solenoid valve plunger to manually lower
the shuttle guide to the reaction vessel and then visually determine if the
left edge of the shuttle guide is just touching the reaction vessel.
If the alignment is correct, move the cursor down to the Vessel Transfer
Shuttle to Load field and continue with the next step.
If an adjustment is needed, use F3 and F4 to visually align the left edge of
the shuttle guide until it just touches the reaction vessel. When this
alignment is complete, press F8: Accept and continue with the next step.
Alignment
The left edge of the shuttle vessel guide on the end of the
vessel transfer shuttle is just touching the vessel in the wash
wheel.
300178A-025
2006/12
4-13
Aligning
Valve Plunger
Press Here
Vessel Shuttle
Guide Solenoid
Vessel Gate
Solenoid
Valve Plunger
Press Here
302045A-033
4-14
2006/12
Aligning
Vessel is Centered
Within Guide
300178A-035
2006/12
4-15
Aligning
Segment
With the instrument in Standby, open the left cabinet door and turn the
service key to the right (Interlock Override position).
Raise the sample lid.
Go to the IMT Arm Alignments screen.
Press F7: DIAGNOSTICS
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
PORT
SEGMENT OUTER
SEGMENT INNER
CLOCKWISE / C CLOCKWISE:
25
HM / IMT BOTTLE
F2: C / CLOCKWISE
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F8: ACCEPT
302045A-305
4
5
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the box on the screen to the
target to which you want to align the IMT probe.
Press F7: Check Align and follow any messages as they appear on the
screen to place the appropriate alignment gauge in position. Remember
that the segment alignment gauge must be placed on either a 5- or 7-mL
adaptor.
WARNING: The IMT probe is a biohazard and a puncture hazard. Follow
your laboratorys safe handling procedures for contact with
and disposal of this probe in a sharps container.
4-16
2006/12
Aligning
Visually check for correct alignment using the photographs on the pages
that follow. If an adjustment is needed, visually align the probe using the
function keys on the screen.
7 When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
8 To align to another target, follow steps 47 again.
9 When you are finished aligning the IMT probe, press Exit and follow any
messages that appear on the screen to ensure that all alignment gauges
have been removed and, if your instrument has an aliquot wheel, that the
original aliquot wheel has been placed back on the instrument.
10 Close the sample lid and turn the service key back to its vertical
(Normal) position.
11 Run quality control for Na, K, Cl.
2006/12
4-17
Aligning
Good alignment practice:
After aligning to a target, press
F7: Check Align and ensure
that the system moves and
returns to the new alignment
position.
Target
Drain
Target
Port
Centered over and just above the target circle on the IMT drain/port gauge.
4-18
2006/12
2006/12
Aligning
Target
Segment Outer
Centered over and just above the target circle on the segment alignment
gauge. Remember that the segment alignment gauge must be placed on
either a 5- or 7-mL adapter.
Segment Inner
Target
IMT Probe
Cleaner Bottle
Centered over and just above the rubber septum in the bottle top.
4-19
Aligning
Good alignment practice:
Target
Aliquot Inner
Centered over and just above the target circle on the orange aliquot
alignment gauge.
Aliquot Outer
Centered over the target circle on the orange aliquot alignment gauge.
Probe Centered
Over Hole
300177A-13
4-20
2006/12
Aligning
OPERATING MENU
ON
70.0
F2:
F4:
1
An IMT calibration will be
scheduled.
After you perform this
alignment, an IMT calibration
will automatically be scheduled
for you when you exit from this
screen.
2006/12
4-21
Aligning
Photometer Alignment
1
2
Nice feature of this
alignment!
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
dark calibration:
reference:
sample (outer on):
sample (outer off):
8929.98 Hz
9030.86 Hz
9029.11 Hz
lamp: HIGH
time on HIGH =
low calib level:
43.5 %
high calib level:
56.2 %
0.0 min
nm
mAU offset
293
340
383
405
452
510
540
577
600
700
315
325
312
305
312
311
313
309
309
311
F6:
F7:
F8:
225156A-003
3
4
5
mAU:
The alignment is in
progress when ...
The screen plot shown at the
right is slowly appearing on the
screen.
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
225156A-001
7
8
9
4-22
Aligning
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
240883B-144
F1:
F2:
F3:
F6:
F7:
F8:
300178A-006
(Continue with the R1 reagent arm to drain alignment on the next page.)
2006/12
4-23
Aligning
300178A-027
3
4
Good alignment practice:
After aligning, press F7:
Check Align and ensure that
the system moves and returns
to the new alignment position.
4-24
Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
2006/12
Aligning
1
2
3
Alignment
Gauge
240883B-127
5
Good alignment practice:
After aligning, press F7:
Check Align and ensure that
the system moves and returns
to the new alignment position.
If the probe is aligned correctly, the probe should be within the flat
circled tip in the center of the alignment gauge and just above the gauge.
If an adjustment is needed, continue with step 5; if the probe is aligned
correctly, skip to step 6.
Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
CAUTION! Perform the Up/Down alignment first to avoid possible damage to the probe.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept and follow the instructions
as they appear in the message area of the screen to remove the reagent
probe alignment gauge.
(Continue with the R1 reagent arm to reagent tray alignment on the next
page.)
2006/12
4-25
Aligning
1
2
3
240883B-144
240883B-22
5
6
7
Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
Press Exit and follow the messages as they appear to remove the reagent
tray alignment gauge and return the reagent cartridge (if one was removed) to its original slot in the reagent tray.
WARNING: If you removed a reagent cartridge, you must place that SAME
cartridge in the reagent tray slot from which you removed it!
4-26
2006/12
Aligning
screwdriver
9/64" Allen wrench
Reagent probe gauge
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
F1:
F2:
F3:
F6:
F7:
F8:
300178A-006
(Continue with the R2 reagent arm to drain alignment on the next page.)
2006/12
4-27
Aligning
3
Good alignment practice:
After aligning, press F7: Check
Align and ensure that the
system moves and returns to the
new alignment position.
Coarse Adjustment
1 Use a screwdriver to loosen (do not remove) the two alignment bracket
screws.
Adjustment Screw Is
Located Under Top of Bracket
Loosen These
2 Screws
300178A-028
Adjustment screw
location:
The adjustment screw is
located above the baseplate
under the left side of the
bracket.
4-28
Use the 9/64" Allen wrench to turn the adjustment screw on the bracket in
the same direction (clockwise or counterclockwise) that the reagent probe
needs to be moved. One turn of the adjustment screw will move the probe
approximately one-half of the probe width.
3 Press F7: Check Align. When any part of the probe is above the hole in
the cover of the drain, tighten the two alignment bracket screws.
4 Return to step 3 in the "R2 Reagent Arm to Drain Alignment" procedure
above.
(Continue with the R2 reagent arm to target alignment on the next page.)
2006/12
Aligning
SAMPLE
1
2
3
Note
difference
in tops of
gauges
18th Hole
240883B-45
4
What does just above the
gauge mean?
You should just be able to fit a
piece of printer paper between the
probe tip and the gauge.
6
7
If the probe is aligned correctly, the probe should be within the flat
circled tip in the center of the alignment gauge and just above the gauge.
If an adjustment is needed, continue with step 5; if the probe is aligned
correctly, skip to step 6.
Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
CAUTION! Perform the Up/Down alignment first to avoid possible damage to the probe.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
Answer the prompt Additional reagent arm to cuvette alignments should
be checked. Check? (y/n) by pressing y and following the prompts as
they appear on the screen.
CAUTION! It is very important to use the proper alignment gauge indicated in each prompt. The SAMPLE probe gauge has a white
plastic top; the REAGENT probe gauge has a stainless steel
top.
Align the probe using the PROPER alignment gauge indicated in the
prompt and following steps 46 above.
(Continue with the R2 reagent arm to reagent tray alignment on the next
page.)
2006/12
4-29
Aligning
1
2
3
240883B-144
240883B-59
5
6
Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
4-30
(Continue with the R2 reagent arm to incubate wheel alignment on the next
page.)
2006/12
Aligning
1
2
300178A-019
4
5
Visually align the probe using the Function keys on the screen.
F1 and F2 move the incubate wheel clockwise and counterclockwise.
F3 and F4 move the R2 probe in and out.
F5 and F6 move the R2 probe up and down.
When the R2 probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
Press Exit and follow the messages as they appear to remove the reagent
tray alignment gauge and return the reagent cartridge (if one was removed during these alignments) to its original slot in the reagent tray.
WARNING: If you removed a reagent cartridge, you must place that SAME
cartridge in the reagent tray slot from which you removed it!
2006/12
4-31
Aligning
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
REAGENT ARM ALIGNMENTS
240883B-144
INSERT
AUTO LOADER
CLOCKWISE / C CLOCKWISE:
R1 ARM
R2 ARM
-4
673
CARTRIDGE DETECTED: NO
2418
Use the left and right arrow keys to select the mode
F1: TRAY CW
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F8: ACCEPT
225156A-305
2
3
From the Reagent Tray Offsets screen, press F7: Check Align.
Check the Insert alignment by sighting along the automatic loader channel and visually determine whether the reagent cartridge in the reagent
tray is centered in the automatic loader channel. If an adjustment is
required, use the function keys described on the screen to move the
reagent tray clockwise (cw) or counterclockwise (ccw) as needed and
then press F8: Accept.
4-32
2006/12
4
5
Use the right arrow key to move the cursor box to the Auto Loader mode.
Press F5: Insert Gauge and follow the messages as they appear on the
screen to insert the reagent tray alignment gauge into the instrument. If
you are prompted to remove a reagent cartridge, this same cartridge must
be placed into the instrument at the end of this procedure.
The alignment positions are described and shown below.
Mode
Alignment Position
Auto Loader
R1 Arm
Press F1: Pos Gauge. The R1 probe should be just above and centered
within the target circle on the gauge. Use the function keys described on
the screen to align to the alignment position.
R2 Arm
Press F1: Pos Gauge. The R2 probe should be just above and centered
within the target circle on the gauge. Use the function keys described on
the screen to align to the alignment position.
7
8
9
Aligning
Use the right arrow key to move to the next mode and repeat step 6.
When you are finished with your alignments, press F8: Accept.
Press Exit and follow the messages as they appear to remove the reagent
tray alignment gauge and return the reagent cartridge (if one was removed) to its original slot in the reagent tray.
WARNING: If you removed a reagent cartridge, you must place that SAME
cartridge in the reagent tray slot from which you removed it!
2006/12
4-33
Aligning
240883B-57
2
3
With the instrument in Standby, open the left cabinet door and turn the
service key to the right (Interlock Override position).
Raise the sample and reagent lids.
Go to the Sampler Arm Alignment screen. Each sample probe alignment
begins from this screen.
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
F5:
F7:
4-34
2006/12
Aligning
1
2
3
5
Good alignment practice:
After aligning, press F7: Check
Align and ensure that the
system moves and returns to the
new alignment position.
CAUTION! Perform the Up/Down alignment first to avoid possible damage to the probe.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept and follow the instructions
as they appear in the message area of the screen to remove the sample
probe alignment gauge.
2006/12
4-35
Aligning
Cup
Alignment
Gauge
Adapter
300177A-18
Press F7: Check Align and follow the messages as they appear on the
screen to place the cup alignment gauge in the top of an adaptor in
segment #1, position #1.
If the probe is aligned correctly, it should be positioned just above the
gauge and within the target circle of the gauge.
If an adjustment is needed, continue with step 4; if the probe is aligned
correctly, skip to step 5.
Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
CAUTION! Perform the Up/Down alignment first to avoid possible damage to the probe.
5 When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
6 Use the right arrow key to move the box on the screen to Segment Inner.
7 Press F7: Check Align and follow the messages as they appear on the
screen to move the cup alignment gauge into the top of an adaptor in
segment #1, position #2.
8 If the probe is aligned correctly, it should be positioned within the target
circle in the outer hole of the gauge.
If an adjustment is needed, continue with step 9. If the probe is aligned
correctly, skip to step 10.
9 Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
10 When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
11 Press Exit and follow the messages as they appear on the screen to
remove the cup alignment gauge.
(Continue with sample probe to drain alignment on the next page.)
4-36
2006/12
Aligning
If the probe is aligned correctly, the probe should be centered above the
drain hole. If your instrument has the newer style drain with two holes in
it, align to the hole that is closest to the reagent tray. If you have an older
style drain, there is only one hole in the drain.
If an adjustment is needed, continue with step 3. If the probe is aligned
correctly, skip to step 4.
Visually align the probe using the F1 and F2 function keys.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
3
4
2006/12
4-37
Aligning
1
2
300178A-020
Visually align the probe using the Function keys on the screen.
F1 and F2 move the sample probe clockwise and counterclockwise.
F3 and F4 move the sample probe up and down.
F5 and F6 move the incubate wheel clockwise and counterclockwise.
When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
(Continue with sample probe maximum depth alignment on the next page.)
4-38
2006/12
Aligning
OPERATING MENU
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
ALIGNMENT MENU
PRIMARY TUBE
PED TUBE
SSC
Move the probe until the nut is at the top of the tube.
UP / DOWN
1000
100
1 [outer]
26 [inner]
27 [interval]
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F6:
F8: ACCEPT
184543A-323
2006/12
2
3
Move the box in the Max Depth in: field to the appropriate sample
container.
Press F7: Check Probe and follow any messages as they appear on the
screen to place the appropriate container into the proper segment position.
Any tube/sample you must remove from segment #1 to insert the container for this alignment will be placed back in its position later in this
procedure.
4-39
Aligning
Set the correct probe depth using the F3 and F4 function keys.
Container
Primary Tube
Align to the primary tube that sits the highest in the segment. The
bottom edge of the nut on the sample probe should be even with the
top of the primary tube. See illustration below.
PED
Align to the pediatric (PED) tube that sits the highest in the segment.
The sample probe tip should be just above the bottom of the
pediatric (PED) tube.
SSC
Align to the primary tube/SSC combination that sits the highest in the
segments. The sample probe tip should be just above the bottom of
the SSC. The size of the sample tube used during this SSC
alignment should now be used with all SSC samples.
For processing serum and plasma, primary tube/SSC combinations that present the SSC at a lower height may be used only if
the SSC is filled with a maximum of 1.0 mL sample.
Sample Arm
Bottom edge of this nut
should be level with
top of primary tube
Probe
a216127-182r
5
6
7
4-40
2006/12
Aligning
1
2
Reminder:
Leave the aliquot wheel lid open
while performing this alignment.
300177A-16
3
What does just above the
gauge mean?
You should just be able to fit a
piece of printer paper between the
probe tip and the gauge.
2006/12
CAUTION! Perform the Up/Down alignment first to avoid possible damage to the probe.
5 When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
6 Use the right arrow key to move the box on the screen to Aliquot Outer.
7 Press F7: Check Align.
8 If the probe is aligned correctly, it should be positioned within the target
circle in the outer hole of the gauge.
If an adjustment is needed, continue with step 9. If the probe is aligned
correctly, skip to step 10.
9 Visually align the probe using the function keys described on the screen.
10 When the probe is aligned, press F8: Accept.
11 Press Exit and follow the messages as they appear on the screen to
remove the aliquot wheel alignment gauge and reinstall the original
aliquot wheel.
12 Close the sample and reagent lids and turn the service key back to its
vertical (Normal) position.
4-41
Aligning
4-42
2006/12
Troubleshooting
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
2006/12
5-1
Troubleshooting
5-2
2006/12
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Overview
This Troubleshooting module contains information to help you resolve
problems on the Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system. There are
two main components to troubleshooting a problem:
specifying the problem by obtaining all information related to it.
solving the problem.
2006/12
5-3
Troubleshooting
5-4
2006/12
Troubleshooting
Chemistry Troubleshooting
Instrument problems are evident when the system displays an error message.
Chemistry problems, however, may not display an error message and may
become evident only when test results are reviewed.
The following tips will help prevent chemistry problems:
Perform scheduled maintenance to avoid problems.
Calibrate or verify a new lot of Flex reagent cartridges before you run
out of the current lot.
Check the expiration date of the calibrator/verifier in use.
Use fresh quality control materials and check their expiration dates.
Be sure that QC values are within the assay range identified for each
method.
Check for interfering substances that may affect test results (refer to test
methodology insert sheet).
Assure proper handling and preparation of samples (pretreatment, preservative, etc.).
2006/12
5-5
Troubleshooting
5-6
2006/12
Troubleshooting
2006/12
5-7
Troubleshooting
Rerun the System Check. If the asterisk still appears, follow the appropriate
troubleshooting in this section for the system (reagent arm, sampler, HM
wash, or IMT) that has the asterisks.
Note: Ensure that all other system check results are acceptable BEFORE
troubleshooting this problem using the items listed below.
Prime the appropriate probe cleaner from the Pump Prime screen.
Check the tightness of the probe cleaner tubing connections to the pump
and drain.
Check that the probe drain and fittings are not leaking.
Check that the probe cleaner tubing is completely inserted into and
reaches the bottom of the bottle.
Check that the correct cleaner solution is in place.
No System Check Printout
If you do not receive a system check printout:
5-8
Check the sample status to see if the system check is still processing.
Check that you pressed F1: Start to start the system check.
Check that there is not a system need for an ABS Flex reagent cartridge.
Check the short sample load list for a possible short sample in the cup
that contains the ABS solution.
2006/12
Troubleshooting
2006/12
Possible Cause
To resolve
The reagent lid must be closed and all instrument side instrument panels and doors must be closed when a system check is
processing.
Photometer is misaligned
5-9
Troubleshooting
5-10
Possible Cause
To resolve
Reagent probe is
misaligned.
Crimped or pinched
reagent tubing.
2006/12
Troubleshooting
2006/12
Possible Cause
To resolve
Look at the System Check printout and see what ABS Flex
Lot number was used for the System Check by the instrument. Ensure that you filled the sample cup with fresh ABS
from this same lot number.
Sample probe is
misaligned.
5-11
Troubleshooting
To resolve
To resolve
5-12
Possible Cause
To resolve
SD > 1.6
Possible Causes
To resolve
Misaligned R2 probe
Partially blocked wash probe
2006/12
Troubleshooting
To resolve
General:
Not filling the sample cup
with ABS from the same
lot that the instrument
used for the System Check.
Look at the System Check printout and see what ABS Flex
Lot number was used for the System Check by the instrument. Ensure that you filled the sample cup with ABS from
this same lot number.
Low Mean:
Loose, crimped, damaged,
or partially plugged
IMT probe tubing.
High Mean:
Check the same possible causes as for Low Mean, plus:
Using an old ABS sample.
Sample probe is
misaligned to the
aliquot wheel.
SD > 1.4
Loose, crimped, damaged
supply tubing.
2006/12
5-13
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
The Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system display has a line
near the top of the screen that is only used to display error messages. In
addition, the system software has two screens, Active System Errors and
Error Log, that enable you to review errors that have occurred.
When the system detects an error condition, it displays an error message in
the error message area, and the alarm sounds.
The system can display only one error message at a time. If more than one
error condition occurs at the same time, the system uses a priority ranking to
determine which one to display.
Some error messages will stop system processing; others will not. If system
processing stops, you will need to reset the instrument by pressing the Reset
key to clear the error message and/or resume processing.
An error message may have one or more minor error messages associated
with it. These minor error messages provide more specific information about
why the error occurred. It is these minor errors that you will troubleshoot.
OPERATING MENU
5-14
PRIORITY
40
CODE
ERROR MESSAGE
Insufficient IMT Consumables
(383)
F1:
F2:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
XP234324A-331
2006/12
Troubleshooting
OPERATING MENU
ERROR LOG
ERROR MESSAGE
CODE
(005)
(383)
(165)
METHOD
TIME
Tue Jan 12 16:00
Mon Jan 4 10:30
Sun Jan 3 08:30
F1:
F2:
F7:
F8:
XP302264S-009
2006/12
Press the space bar to remove the help message from the screen.
5-15
Troubleshooting
IMT Troubleshooting
IMT Results Troubleshooting
If the IMT results are questionable and there is no error message indicated by
the instrument or test report slip, for example, any of the following situations
could have occurred:
QC is out
failed delta check on the LIS
results are inconsistent for the patients clinical picture
abnormal Anion gap
Follow the steps below to troubleshoot these situations.
1 Check for insufficient sample in the sample container.
2 Rerun the sample. If the results are still questionable, do the basic
troubleshooting steps below for Na, K, Cl results.
5-16
2006/12
Troubleshooting
Std A
Std B
OVERRIDE
Na
55.59
41.33
12.75
NO
59.88
-14.01
30.32
NO
Cl
-49.42
8.28
25.59
NO
0.41
0.07
0.50
0.08
F1: CALIBRATE
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
3
4
5
2006/12
Check that the IMT cartridge interface (tower) is completely closed and
that no tubing is being pinched by the tower.
Roll up the Standard A, Standard B, and Flush fluid bags and check for
sufficient volume of fluid and that the bag fitting is in the down (toward
the tray) position. Also check the tubing from each bag to ensure there are
no air bubbles in this tubing. If necessary, replace the bags.
Prime with Salt Bridge Solution and verify that it is flowing through the
R1 tubing and into the X2 tubing.
Bleach the IMT Waste tubing. See Cleaning the IMT Waste Tubing in
Module 3: Maintaining.
Go to the Fluids Prime/Pump Alignment screen and check the IMT pump
alignment. If the IMT pumping rate field is less than 68:
a) replace the X tubing inside the IMT pump
b) prime with Salt Bridge solution
c) calibrate the IMT
Replace the QuikLYTE sensor. See Replacing the QuikLYTE Integrated Multisensor in Module 2: Using.
5-17
Troubleshooting
5-18
2006/12
Troubleshooting
2006/12
5-19
Troubleshooting
IMT Calibration not Valid [509] or IMT in Error for Test [510]
1 Press Reset to resume operation.
2 Check the Error Log for an error that occurred at the same time as this
error, e.g., a Module Not Ready error, and troubleshoot that error.
5-20
2006/12
Troubleshooting
4 times
8 times
16 times
16 Times
8 Times
Fluid level arrows
are approximate.
4 Times
302045A-205
2006/12
5-21
Troubleshooting
5
6
7
5-22
Bleach the IMT Waste tubing. See Cleaning the IMT Waste Tubing in
Module 3: Maintaining.
Clean the IMT port. See Cleaning the IMT Port in Module 3: Maintaining.
Go to the Fluids Prime/Pump Alignment screen and check the IMT pump
alignment. If the IMT pumping rate field is less than 68:
a) replace the X tubing inside the IMT pump
b) prime with Salt Bridge solution
c) calibrate the IMT
2006/12
Troubleshooting
4 times
8 times
16 times
5
2006/12
Clean the IMT port. See Cleaning the IMT Port in Module 3: Maintaining.
5-23
Troubleshooting
Priming...
From the Operating Menu,
press:
F4: System Prep
F3: IMT
F3: Align/Prime
To prime with Standard A
press:
F5: Prime Std A
To prime with Salt Bridge
Solution press:
F1: Prime Salt
5-24
2006/12
Troubleshooting
IMT
Pump
D1
R1
X
QuikLYTE
X2
Salt
Bridge
Solution
Sample
Diluent
IMT
Sample
Port
X1
X2
W2
To
Waste
R1
1
2
X0
X1
D2
X1
D1
To
Waste
Air
IMT
Rotary Valve
Flush
Standard B
F1
Out
Out
Diluent
Pump
P55F
F2
Out
Flush
Pump
P55E
Standard A
PN 752007.001 Rev. A
2006/12
5-25
Troubleshooting
Tubing Chart
Tubing
A
B
D1
D2
F1
F2
R1
X
X0
X1
X2
W2
Waste
Connects
Standard A bag to IMT rotary valve
Standard B bag to IMT rotary valve
Diluent bottle to Diluent pump
Diluent pump to IMT port
Flush bag to Flush pump
Flush pump to IMT port
Salt Bridge Solution bottle to QuikLYTE sensor
Sample tubing inside IMT pump
IMT port to IMT rotary valve
IMT rotary valve to QuikLYTE sensor
QuikLYTE sensor to IMT pump
IMT port to solenoid (located under the baseplate)
To Chemistry Waste bottle
Tubing Kit
IMT Pump
IMT Rotary Valve
IMT Miscellaneous
5-26
Contains tubing
X
A, B, X0, X1
D1, D2, F1, F2, R1, X2, W, Waste
2006/12
Troubleshooting
2006/12
5-27
Troubleshooting
Solution
1 Press Reset. If the error reappears, continue troubleshooting.
Open the left cabinet door and turn the service key to the right (Interlock
Override position). When you are finished troubleshooting, return this
key to its vertical Normal position. Open the instrument lids or cabinet
doors as necessary so you can observe the movement of the component.
Press Reset again and observe the movement of the component. Depending on what you observe, follow the appropriate action below.
Move the cursor to the appropriate field in the Motors portion of the
screen, then press the appropriate Function key as shown in the table and
watch this field.
If the field changes to PASS, call the Technical Assistance Center. If the
field DOES NOT change, the sensor has probably failed. Replace it, but
first check to see if its P/J connector is loose or unplugged. (See how to
replace the particular sensor in Module 3: Maintaining.)
Press Reset.
If the error reappears, call the Technical Assistance Center.
5-28
Press Reset.
If the error reappears, call the Technical Assistance Center.
2006/12
2006/12
F5: Photometer
Error Number
82
41A
42A
Also occurs if the sample lid is up and the service key is in its Normal position. Close the sample lid and press Reset.
Sometimes occurs if the knob on the top of the monopump is too tight. Try slightly loosening this knob and press Reset.
45A
84
84
83D
20D
16D
20C
16C
50E
50D
32C
80D
80B
32C
32D
16C
15C
13D
50D
16D
15C
50E
24-10B
24-10A
24-3C
24-10C
24-10A
24-5B
24-5D
24-5D
24-4B
24-3C
24-4A
24-4D
24-3C
24-5C
24-5C
24-3D
24-4D
24-4C
24-3D
24-3B
24-3B
24-3A
24-5A
24-5A
24-3B
24-3A
24-5A
F1: Cycle
F8: Cycle
then
press
48B
F3: IMT
Mono Valve
Mono Piston
Vertical Probe
Small Pump
[observe Home]
Radial In/Out
Large Pump
Vertical Probe
Rotate Arm
Home
Radial In/Out
Vertical Probe
[home]
Rotation
Large Pump
Large Pump
Rotate Arm
Small Pump
Small Pump
Vertical Probe
Move the
Cursor to
this field
590,591,593
5-29
Troubleshooting
What Happened
The component did not move the proper distance.
Solution
1 Press Reset. If the error reappears, continue troubleshooting.
3
4
5
6
Lubricate
R2 probe
Wipe off the splined shaft (or middle of the three shafts) on the R2 arm.
Then lightly lubricate this shaft with Tufoil.
R1 probe
Wipe off the splined shaft (or middle of the three shafts) on the R1 arm.
Then lightly lubricate this shaft with Tufoil.
Sample probe
Lift up the sample arm and wipe off the sample arm shaft. Then lightly
lubricate this shaft with Tufoil.
Syringe pump
7
8
9
5-30
2006/12
2006/12
F3: IMT
089, 090
119, 120
143, 144
429, 430
435, 436
543, 544
84
84
83D
20D
20C
50E
50D
32C
80D
80B
32C
32D
13D
Mono Valve
Mono Piston
Vertical Probe
Radial In/Out
Vertical Probe
Rotate Arm
Home
Radial In/Out
Vertical Probe
[home]
F8: Cycle
50D
41B
42B
* To get to the Electro/Mechanical Diagnostics screen: From the Operating Menu press F7: Diagnostics > F1: Electro/Mech.
1
Before pressing F2: Test Mtr Only, rotate the orange belt manually counterclockwise for one complete turn.
624, 625
618, 619
606, 607
45B
059, 060
Rotation
(observe Home)
50E
600, 601
Rotate Arm
48E
F5: Photometer
Vertical Probe
P/J
Name
594, 595
then
press
48E
Error Number
Move the
Cursor to
this field
579, 580
5-31
Troubleshooting
5-32
2006/12
Troubleshooting
OPERATING MENU
ERROR LOG
ERROR MESSAGE
R2 Probe Illegal Error
R2 Arm Lost Steps
CODE
(075)
(053)
TIME
METHOD LOC
F1:
F2:
F7:
F8:
234324A-332
Troubleshoot the error code(s) that occurred at the exact same time or the
error code immediately below this error code.
In the example screen above, you would troubleshoot the R2 Arm Lost
Steps error message because it occurred at the same time as the R2
probe illegal error message.
For information on troubleshooting that error code:
a) Move the cursor to the error and press F5: More Info.
b) Refer to the appropriate message in this troubleshooting section.
2006/12
5-33
Troubleshooting
2
3
4
5
5-34
Photometer Board
Cuvette Board
2006/12
Troubleshooting
CONSOLE MENU
1 - Restart the Dimension(R) Application Software
2 - Install or Update software
3 - Prepare to turn off the instrument
234324A-332
3
4
2006/12
5-35
Troubleshooting
5-36
2006/12
Customizing
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-25
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-28
6-29
2006/12
6-32
6-35
6-35
6-35
6-1
Customizing
6-55
6-55
6-57
6-58
6-58
6-61
6-61
6-62
6-63
6-2
2006/12
Customizing
2006/12
6-3
Customizing
6-4
2006/12
Customizing
Reminder!
The fields that appear on the
System Configuration Menu
screen will vary based on the
additional modules that have
been installed on your
instrument.
Refer to that Module's
Operator's Guide for information about those fields.
ON
HM Module Configured:
ON
ON
F4: COMPUTER
F7: PASSWORD
F8: TEMPERATURE
300178A-007
At the System Configuration Menu screen, use the arrow keys to move the
cursor to the desired field and press the Enter key to change the information
for the field. If requested by the software, type the system password and press
Enter to confirm the change.
Each of the fields and function keys that appear on this screen are described
on pages that follow.
2006/12
6-5
Customizing
Meaning
Reminder!
Both HM fields MUST be set to
ON.
6-6
*Automatic Cartridge
Removal
*Automatic Rerun
*Automatic Dilution
ON indicates that the system will rerun the test using a smaller
sample volume when autodilution conditions are met.
*Water In
*Waste Out
*Automatic Repeat
for Panics
*Automatic Reflex
Testing
*HM Module
Configured
*Automatic
HM Vessel Load
2006/12
Customizing
2006/12
Function Key
Use to:
Create ten panels with up to 20 tests on each panel. All 20 tests can
then be requested with a single keystroke. See Creating Panel
Keys later in this module.
F3: Date/Time
Change the date and time. To change the date and time:
1 Press F3: Date/Time.
2 In the Date field, type the day. Press F2: Next Month to select
the month. Then type the year (e.g., 18-JUL-1998).
3 Move the cursor to the Hour and Minute fields and enter the time.
Use the 24-hour time convention for the hour (e.g., 2:00 p.m. is
1400).
4 If you want to display the date/time as MM-DD-YY rather
than DD-MM-YY as in step 2 above, just press the Enter
key.
5 Press F1: Store Change before exiting from this screen. Verify
that the entered date and time are correct.
F4: Computer
Configure the IMT system. Press this function key and the IMT
status box at the top of the screen will change appropriately.
If the box indicates IMT Not Config, this means that the IMT is off;
any other wording in this box indicates that the IMT is configured.
F7: Password
F8: Temperature
6-7
Customizing
See the next page for how to set up an automatic reflex for a method.
6-8
2006/12
Customizing
METHOD PARAMETERS
METHOD:
Test Name:
Decimal Places:
Result Units:
Calculation: LINEAR
Standard Vol:
ul
Auto Dilute Vols: serum / plasma:
ul urine:
INTERVALS
SERUM / PLASMA
_
_
_
REFERENCE
ASSAY
PANIC
CSF/BLOOD
_
_
REFLEX IF <
ul
URINE
_
_
OR >
RUN
C1
C0
2
3
5
To deactivate reflex testing for a
specific method:
1 Enter a 0 (zero) in both the
upper and lower reflex limits.
2 Press F4: Store Params.
The RUN field test will remain on
the screen, but it will not be
reflexed because the upper and
lower reflex limits are set to zero.
2006/12
Press the method test key for which you want to enter reflex values and a
reflex test.
Move the cursor box to the Reflex fields and enter the less than (<) and
greater than (>) limits that you want to trigger the reflex test. You can
enter any limits, even those that are within the normal results for the
method. You can have one-sided limits by entering only one of these
fields.
With the cursor box now positioned to the right of the Run field, press the
test method key for the method you want to automatically reflex if the
test result is outside the reflex limits you entered in step 3. Only one
reflex test is permitted per method.
If you set
If you want to set up a reflex test for another test method, press any arrow
key to move the cursor out of the Run field, and then press the test
method key for the next method.
6-9
Customizing
An automatic rerun of a test can be performed when the test result is outside
the methods panic values as entered by the laboratory.
METHOD PARAMETERS
METHOD:
Test Name:
Decimal Places:
Result Units:
Calculation: LINEAR
Standard Vol:
ul
Auto Dilute Vols: serum / plasma:
ul urine:
INTERVALS
SERUM / PLASMA
_
_
_
REFERENCE
ASSAY
PANIC
C0
CSF/BLOOD
URINE
_
_
REFLEX IF <
ul
_
_
OR >
RUN
C1
2
3
Report slip indications of
results with high or low
panic values.
A result with a high panic value
on the test report slip has the
letters hp after it (or lp for a
low panic value). Since there will
be two results shown because of
the automatic panic rerun, a
mean, SD, and CV for these
results will also appear on the
test report. All results will be sent
to the host computer.
Press the method test key for which you want to enter panic values.
Move the cursor box to the Panic row in the Serum/Plasma column and
enter the low and high panic values for that method. You do not have to
set both a low and a high value; you can set a single-sided panic value
limit.
If you set
6-10
2006/12
Customizing
When both the automatic reflex and panic rerun features are activated for a
method, you may see test results on the printed test report that were not
ordered directly by the operator or downloaded from an LIS.
For example, suppose the automatic panic and reflex features have both been
configured to ON and that the Method Parameters screen for CA, PHOS, and
MG have been set up as follows:
CA
has been set up with a single-sided high panic range of 12 and a
reflex range of < 6 and > 9.5 with a reflex test of PHOS.
PHOS has been set up with a reflex range of < 2 and > 5 and with a
reflex test of MG but has no panic range.
MG
has no reflex range or panic range specified.
Here are the report slip and a table of what the instrument would do because a
CA test result exceeded both its panic and reflex limits.
TEST
2006/12
RESULT
REF. INTERVAL
UNITS
1 - CA
13.1 hp
8.8 - 10.5
mg/dL
2 - CA
13.2 hp
8.8 - 10.5
mg/dL
3 - PHOS
1.2 LO
2.5 - 4.9
mg/dL
4 - MG
3.6 HI
1.8 - 2.4
mg/dL
5 - CA
mean: 13.15
sd: 0.071
cv: 0.54
Test
Why was
test run?
Test Result
1 - CA
Original test
13.1 exceeds both the panic and reflex limits for CA.
2 - CA
hp rerun
from 1-CA
This test was run because the 1-CA result exceeded the panic
limits for CA.
This test was run because the 1-CA exceeded the reflex limits
for CA.
4 - MG
reflex test
from 3-PHOS
This test was run because the 3-PHOS 1.2 result exceeds
reflex limits for PHOS. No additional reflex testing will be done for
4-MG because in this example the MG method did not have a reflex
test specified.
5 - CA
statistics
6-11
Customizing
RESULT NAME
Anion GAP
Anion GAP
Calculated Osmolality
BUN / Creatinine Ratio
Globulin
Albumin / Globulin Ratio
Free Thyroxine Index
Indirect Bilirubin
(A)HDL Risk Factor
LDL - Cholesterol
6-12
[AGAP ]
[AGAP ]
[OSMO ]
[BN/CR ]
[GLOB ]
[A/G
]
[FTI
]
[IBIL
]
[RISK ]
[LDL
]
INTERVAL
ON / OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
F1:
F2:
F3: ON / OFF
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8: STORE
231619A-005
2
3
4
5
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Interval field for a calculated result.
Enter the reference interval.
Press F3: On/Off to turn on that calculated result.
Press F8: Store. Only those calculated results that are turned on will have
their changes stored.
2006/12
Customizing
Result
Equation
AGAP
A/G
BN/CR
Calculated result
abbreviations:
AGAP
A/G
Anion GAP
Albumin/Globulin
Ratio
BUN/CR BUN/Creatinine Ratio
FTI
Free Thyroxine Index
GLOB
Globulin
IBIL
Indirect Bilirubin
%ISAT Percent Iron
Saturation
%FPSA Percent Free PSA
LDL
LDLCholesterol
MA/CR Microalbumin/
Creatinine Ratio
MBRI
MB Relative Index
%MB
CKMB
OSMO Calculated Osmolality
RISK
(A)HDL Risk Factor
UIBC
Unbound IronBinding Capacity
2006/12
GLOB
TP ALB
IBIL
LDL
MA/CR
(MALB/CREA) x 100
MALB must be in the unit mg/L and CREA must be in the unit mg/dL. The MA/CR
ratio is reported with the unit mg/g.
MBRI
(MMB/CK) x 100
The MBRI calculated result uses either the MMB or LMMB result in the equation,
whichever was run with the sample.
%FPSA
(FPSA/TPSA) x 100
FPSA and TPSA must be in the same units. %FPSA will be calculated only if the
TPSA result is within the reference interval specified in the CSF/Blood field of the
TPSA Method Parameters screen.
%MB
(CKMB/CK) x 100
Note: %MB indicates the CKMB isoenzyme as a percent of total CK
%ISAT
OSMO
RISK
CHOL / AHDL
Note: The RISK calculated result will use either the HDL or the AHDL result in the
equation, whichever was run on the sample.
UIBC
6-13
Customizing
Calibration Configuration
Define Calibration Product
You can store 150 calibrator products on the instrument.
To display this screen, press the Calib Alert key on the touchscreen, then
press F5: Define Calibration Product.
DEFINE CALIBRATION PRODUCTS
CAL PRODUCT
----------------------
CAL LOT
-------------
PRODUCT EXPIRATION
----------------------------------
Scan product definition from insert sheet or press ENTER to enter manually.
F1: NEW PRODUCT
F7: STORE
F8: PRINT
Max7.4 Cal06-
To enter data on this screen, you can either scan the calibration product
barcode or enter data manually.
Scanning Barcode Data
1 Use the barcode reader to scan the barcode on the calibration product
insert sheet. This fills all fields on the screen.
6-14
2
3
4
5
2006/12
Customizing
CALIBRATION
CAL LOT
------------5JD020
2AF192
4FD058
PRODUCT EXPIRATION
--------------------------------9/1/2006
8/1/2006
9/5/2006
Highlight the product you want to edit. Press F1: Edit Product to display
the Define Calibration Products screen.
DEFINE CALIBRATION PRODUCTS
CAL PRODUCT
--------------------CHEM1 CAL1
METHOD
-----------CA
CREA
GLU
GLUC
LA
BUN
UNITS
-----------mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
mol/L
mg/dL
CAL LOT
------------5JD020
PRODUCT EXPIRATION
--------------------------------9/1/06
F7: STORE
F8: PRINT
Max 7.4 Cal09
3
Key
Function
F7: Store
F8: Print
4
Use the appropriate units
when entering values.
2006/12
To add tests to the product, use the test keys, then enter the bottle values
in the appropriate Level fields.
Press F7: Store.
6-15
Customizing
Meaning
Slope Low
Slope High
Intercept
SD Mean
CALIBRATION
RANGE
Method:
Status: DEFAULT
LOW
-------
HIGH
--------
Slope:
Intercept:
r:
PARAMETER
---------------------S/D of Mean
MAX NEG Bias
MAX POS Bias
LEVEL 1
------------
LEVEL 2
------------
LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4
------------ ------------
LEVEL 5
------------
F3: QC RANGES
F4: CAAP ON
F5: PRINT
F7: STORE
6-16
2006/12
2
3
4
5
6
2006/12
Customizing
Press the test key for the method you want to define.
Press F4: CAAP On. This key toggles between on and off.
Review the automatic acceptance parameters. To change, highlight the
parameter and type the new value.
You can restore the default parameters by pressing F2: Default CAAP.
Press F7: Store.
If you want to print the information on the screen, press F5: Print. To
print a report of all active (ON) methods, press F6: Print Active.
To display all active (ON) methods, press F8: Show Active. When you
select F8: Show Active, these print options are displayed:
Key
Function
6-17
Customizing
Correlations
Some situations may require that your Dimension system and an alternate
system or method provide comparable results. It is suggested that the alternate method be correlated to provide the same results as the Dimension
system. If, however, you find it necessary to correlate your Dimension
system to the alternate method, the Correlation feature provides a way for
you to adjust results by applying slope and intercept values derived from a
correlation between the two methods.
The correlation feature uses simple linear regression to calculate the correlation curve y = mx + b where x is the expected result and y is the observed
result. When you store the correlation curve, the applied slope (mA) and
intercept (bA) are calculated as mA = 1/m and bA = -b/m. The applied slope and
intercept, stored in the Correlation Entry screen, are used to calculate a
correlated result using the following equation:
correlated result = (mA)(uncorrelated result) + bA
When the correlation is performed offline, the applied slope and intercept
values (as calculated above) are entered in the Correlation Entry screen.
Correlation is applied only to patient samples and QC. Correlation is not
applied to calibration; therefore, do not adjust calibrator bottle values when
you calibrate a correlated method.
Recommendations for
correlation samples:
It is recommended that a
minimum of 20 patient
samples be used and that the
results span the assay range
of the method as indicated on
the Dimension method insert
sheet. The Dimension system
correlation feature will allow
you to enter 50 data pairs.
If the correlation samples are
run in duplicate, use the
average of the results
obtained.
6-18
2003/05
Customizing
Remember!
When you correlate a method,
the reference interval, panic
values, reflex values, and
quality control ranges may
change.
2003/05
6-19
Customizing
Recommendations for
correlation samples:
It is recommended that a
minimum of 20 patient
samples be used and that the
results span the assay range
of the method as indicated on
the Dimension method insert
sheet. The Dimension system
correlation feature will allow
you to enter 50 data pairs.
If the correlation samples are
run in duplicate, enter the
average of the results
obtained.
OPERATING MENU
PROCESS CONTROL MENU
CORRELATION
CORRELATION ENTRY
METHOD:
OBSERVED
-----------------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Slope:
r:
***
***
Intercept:
***
F2:
F6: CORRELATED TO
F8: PRINT
MAXP6-20
2
3
6-20
Press the test key for the method that you want to correlate.
Enter the following data for each set of samples processed.
Field
Enter
Sample
Sample ID
Expected
Observed
As you enter these results, the slope, intercept, and r (correlation coefficient) fields are updated automatically and a plot of the data appears on
the screen.
After entering all the sample results, press F7: Show Correl'd.
The screen now shows the expected and correlated data (calculated using
the observed data and the regression statistics), and a linear regression
plot for the correlated data.
Review the information on this screen.
expected and correlated values should now be nearly identical.
statistics should be close to the following:
slope = 1.000
intercept = 0.000
r = 1.000
Decide if the information on this screen is acceptable for your laboratory
operations.
If the information is acceptable, skip to step 8.
If the information is not acceptable, continue with step 7.
2003/05
Customizing
Look for possible discrepant result pairs. Delete discrepant result pairs as
you determine necessary.
To delete a discrepant result pair:
a Press F7: Show Observed.
b Move the cursor to the result pair line.
c Press F3: Delete Line.
d Press F7: Show Correld.
e Return to step 5.
8 Press F6: Correlated to and enter the name of the method or instrument
to which you are correlating the Dimension system.
9 Press F7: Show Observed, then F8: Print to produce a report of the data
you entered. You will not be able to view this data after you store the
correlation.
10 Press F7: Show Correl'd. Press F8: Print to produce a report of the
correlated data.
11 Press F3: Accept Corr to store the information for the method.
12 Press Exit to view the Correlation Entry screen. The system-calculated
slope and intercept for the method will now appear on this list, along with
the Correlated To name.
Press F5: PROCESS CONTROL
OPERATING MENU
PROCESS CONTROL MENU
CORRELATION ENTRY
Method
---------CKMB
COC
CRBM
CREA
CRP
CSA
CTNI
DBIL
DGNA
DGTX
Slp(m)
--------0.9867
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Intr(b) Correlated To
-------- -----------------2.5460 Instrument X
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Slp(m)
--------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Intr(b)
-------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Correlated To
------------------
F1: CORRELATE
F2: STORE
F4: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
MAXP6-15
If you press F5: Show Cor Date, the Correlated To column changes to
Date Correlated.
13 Confirm that the assay range from the Dade Behring Inc. method insert
sheet is entered in the Method Parameters screen.
14 Establish and enter new reference interval, panic values, and reflex limits
for the correlated method.
15 Establish new QC ranges for the correlated method.
The slope and intercept from the correlation will now be applied to all
samples, including QC, in order to maintain the Correlated To status.
2003/05
6-21
Customizing
Use the correlation slope and intercept from your offline correlation to
calculate applied slope and intercept values as follows:
Applied slope = 1/correlation slope
Applied intercept = (-1)(intercept)/correlation slope
For example:
Correlation slope from offline correlation = 1.021
Intercept from offline correlation = 1.434
Applied slope = 1/1.021 = 0.979
Applied intercept = (-1)(1.434)/1.021 = -1.405
Reminder: Be sure to include the negative sign if the intercept is a
negative number.
From the Operating Menu, press F5: Process Ctrl, then F2: Correlation
to display the Correlation Entry screen.
3 Type your password and press Enter.
4 Move the cursor to the method you want to correlate, or press the test key
for the method.
5 Enter the slope value you calculated in step 1. Press Enter.
6 Enter the Intercept value you calculated in step 1. Press Enter.
7 Type the name of the method or instrument to which you are correlating
the Dimension system. Press Enter.
8 Press F2: Store.
9 Confirm that the assay range from the Dade Behring Inc. method insert
sheet is entered in the Method Parameters screen.
10 Establish and enter new reference interval, panic values, and reflex limits
for the correlated method.
11 Establish new QC ranges for the correlated method.
6-22
2003/05
Customizing
Removing a Correlation
If you no longer want to use the correlation data for a method, simply change
the slope and intercept values to 0 (zero):
1 Display the Correlation Entry screen.
2 Type your password and press Enter.
3 Move the cursor to the method, or press the test key for the method.
4 Enter 0 for the slope value. Press Enter.
5 Enter 0 for the Intercept value. Press Enter.
6 Press F2: Store.
7 Confirm that the assay range from the Dade Behring Inc. method insert
sheet is entered in the Method Parameters screen.
8 Establish and enter new reference interval, panic value and reflex limits
for the method.
9 Establish new QC values.
2003/05
6-23
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
CORRELATION ENTRY
Method
---------CKMB
COC
CRBM
CREA
CRP
CSA
CTNI
DBIL
DGNA
DGTX
Slp(m)
--------0.9867
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Intr(b) Correlated To
-------- -----------------2.5460 Instrument X
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Method
---------ECO2
FERR
FPSA
FT4
GENT
GGT
GLU
HCG
HDL
IBCT
Slp(m)
--------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Intr(b)
-------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Correlated To
------------------
F2: STORE
F4: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
MAXP6-16
2
3
Correlation Date
The F5 function key on the Correlation Entry screen toggles the display
between Correlated To and Date Correlated. If you press F5: Show Cor
Date, the screen shows the correlation date where applicable:
CORRELATION ENTRY
Method
---------CKMB
COC
CRBM
CREA
CRP
CSA
CTNI
DBIL
DGNA
DGTX
Slp(m)
--------0.9867
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Slp(m)
--------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Intr(b)
-------***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
***
Correlated To
------------------
F2: STORE
F4: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
MaxP6-16b
6-24
2003/05
Customizing
2006/12
6-25
Customizing
HYDRATION BY LOT
METHOD
AMY
BUN
LOT
AB6030
JE7721
MC3983
NO. TESTS
HYDRATED
NO. TESTS
UNHYDRATED
NO. TESTS TO
BE HYDRATED
0
58
0
10
60
200
0
0
100
GLU
F1:
F2:
F3: INVENTORY
F4: HYDRATE
F5: DELETE
F7:
F8:
MaxP6_18
1
Want to delete an entry?
Press the Shift/Delete key
combination.
Reminder:
F5: Delete is for cancelling
hydrations that are already in
progress.
2
3
4
5
Use the test keys on the keyboard or the cursor keys to move the cursor to
the desired method lot to be hydrated.
Enter the number of tests you want to hydrate for that method lot.
Press Enter.
Repeat steps 13 until you have entered all your hydrations.
Press F4: Hydrate to begin hydration.
6-26
2006/12
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
HYDRATION BY LOT
INVENTORY / HYDRATION
ABS
ACP
ACTM
ALB
ALC
ALP
ALT
AMON
AMY
AST
BUN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CA
CHOL
CK
CKMB
CRBM
CREA
CRP
DBIL
DGNA
GENT
GGT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GLU
HDL
IRN
LA
LDH
LIP
MG
PCHE
PHNO
PHOS
PTN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SAL
T4
TBIL
THEO
TIBC
TOBR
TP
TRIG
TU
UCFP
URCA
ONLY
Activated: OFF
Total Tests to Hydrate:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F6: PRINT
F7:
Enter the number of tests you want to hydrate for each method using any
or all of the methods listed below.
Using
How to use it
Cursor Keys
Move the cursor to the method you want to hydrate and then enter
the number of tests you want to hydrate.
Test Keys
Press the test key for the method you want to hydrate and then
enter the number of tests you want to hydrate.
Panel Keys
Press a predefined panel key, P1P10, and then enter how many
times you want this panel to be hydrated.
Preprogrammed
Setup Lists
2006/12
2
3
4
Press Enter.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have entered all your hydrations.
To begin hydrating, press F4: Hydrate Now.
6-27
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
HYDRATION BY LOT
INVENTORY / HYDRATION
ABS
ACP
ACTM
ALB
ALC
ALP
ALT
AMON
AMY
AST
BUN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CA
CHOL
CK
CKMB
CRBM
CREA
CRP
DBIL
DGNA
GENT
GGT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GLU
HDL
IRN
LA
LDH
LIP
MG
PCHE
PHNO
PHOS
PTN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SAL
T4
TBIL
THEO
TIBC
TOBR
TP
TRIG
TU
UCFP
URCA
ONLY
Activated: OFF
Total Tests to Hydrate:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F6: PRINT
F7:
3
4
Move the cursor to the Day field and use the Enter key to select the start
day; move the cursor to the right and use the Enter key to select the stop
day.
Move the cursor to the right, to the hour and minute fields, and enter the
time you want the hydration to begin. Remember to use the 24-hr clock
convention for the hours.
Move the cursor to the right and use the Enter key to select WEEKLY or
ONLY. See the table below for how this field works with the Day field.
Move the cursor to the Activated field and press the Enter key. The
Activated field will change to On and the Timer Countdown field now
indicates the time remaining until this hydration begins.
Set Day to
Select
Mon to Mon
ONLY
WEEKLY
ONLY
WEEKLY
ONLY
WEEKLY
Mon to Fri
Mon to Sun
6-28
2006/12
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
SYSTEM PREPARATION MENU
HYDRATION BY LOT
INVENTORY/HYDRATION
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GLU
HDL
IRN
LA
LDH
LIP
MG
PCHE
PHNO
PHOS
PTN
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SAL
T4
TBIL
THEO
TIBC
TOBR
TP
TRIG
TU
UCFP
URCA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F2: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
MaxP-6_21
2006/12
1
2
3
4
5
Use the test keys on the keyboard or the cursor keys to move the cursor to
the desired method to be hydrated.
Enter the number of tests you want to hydrate for that method.
Press Enter.
Repeat steps 13 until you have entered all your hydrations.
Press F3: Store Setup.
6-29
Customizing
IMT Configuration
There are two items related to IMT processing which you can customize to
your laboratory's needs:
Include ECO2 in Lytes test method key
Specify the time interval for IMT bleach/condition soak
OPERATING MENU
Na
K
SLOPE CUTOFF
53.0
53.0
C1:
1.0600
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F6:
F7:
6-30
2006/12
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
Na
K
SLOPE CUTOFF
53.0
53.0
C1:
1.0600
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F6:
F7:
2 With the cursor in the IMT bleach/condition soak interval days field, type
the number of days you want to elapse between IMT system cleanings.
3 Press the Enter key.
4 Press F8: Store Params.
2006/12
6-31
Customizing
Remember:
METHOD PARAMETERS
METHOD:
Test Name:
Decimal Places:
Result Units:
Calculation: LINEAR
Standard Vol:
ul
Auto Dilute Vols: serum / plasma:
ul urine:
INTERVALS
SERUM / PLASMA
_
_
_
REFERENCE
ASSAY
PANIC
C0
CSF/BLOOD
_
_
REFLEX IF <
ul
URINE
_
_
OR >
RUN
C1
2
3
6-32
2006/12
Customizing
Field
Decimal Places
Result Units
Calculation
Standard Vol
(or Selected Vol)
2006/12
Calibration Vol
6-33
Customizing
Field
Why is there a reference interval
for CSF/Blood on the BUN
method?
Intervals
CSF/Blood
A/G
AHDL
CSF/Blood
RISK
BUN
CSF/Blood
OSMO
CHOL
CSF/Blood
LDL
CKMB
CSF/Blood
%MB
CO2
Urine
AGAP
CREA
CSF/Blood
BN/CR
DBIL
CSF/Blood
IBIL
ECO2
Urine
AGAP
FPSA
CSF/Blood
%FPSA
HDL
CSF/Blood
RISK
IBCT
CSF/Blood
%ISAT
IRN
CSF/Blood
UIBC
LMMB
CSF/Blood
MBRI
MALB
CSF/Blood
MA/CRI
MMB
CSF/Blood
MBRI
TIBC
CSF/Blood
%ISAT
TP
CSF/Blood
GLOB
TPSA
CSF/Blood
TPSA range in
which %FPSA
is calculated
TU
CSF/Blood
FTI
Assay intervals
Run
Use the test keys to enter the method you want to be automatically reflexed if the test result for this method is outside the reflex
limits entered in the Reflex If field. Only one method can be
entered in this Run field.
6-34
2006/12
Customizing
Automatic Dilutions
The instrument can perform two types of automatic dilutions:
Automated Urine Dilutions (AUD) for BUN, CREA, PHOS, and
URCA
Autodilute (AD) user programmable for urine and serum/plasma
samples
Automated Urine Dilutions (AUD)
Whenever urine is selected as the sample fluid on the Enter Sample Data
screen and BUN, CREA, PHOS, or URCA tests are requested, the sample is
automatically diluted with water by the instrument to make a times-10 dilution. Test results for these four tests on urine samples are then automatically
calculated and printed out using the times-10 dilution. If this AUD test result
is outside the urine assay range for the method, the operator must prepare a
manual dilution. For example, if you manually prepare a times-3 dilution of
the sample and enter a dilution factor of 3 on the Enter Sample Data screen,
the instrument will then make a times-30 dilution (times-3 * times-10 =
times-30) of the sample. Test results are then automatically calculated and
printed out using this times-30 dilution.
2006/12
Autodilute (AD)
Once the autodilute Method Parameters are input and the system is configured to autorerun and autodilute, the Dimension system automatically
performs sample dilutions whenever the calculated result is above the assay
range, or the absorbance of the sample and reagent exceeds the upper absorbance limit for the method. To perform the automatic dilution, the Dimension system aspirates a reduced sample volume (similar to the way you
would make a manual dilution). The dilution ratios are based on incremental
sample volume adjustments.
The Dimension system does not perform dilutions based on the Dilution
field on the Enter Sample Data screen this field is used for your convenience when you want the instrument to calculate the results of your manual
dilutions. If a number is entered in the Dilution field, the Dimension system
will not autodilute the sample. For HCG only, entering a number in the
Dilution field does not disable Automatic Dilution.
To configure the Dimension system autodilute feature, you must first activate both the autodilute and autorerun features on the System Configuration
screen. If either the Automatic Rerun or Automatic Dilution fields are off, use
the arrow keys to move the cursor to the field and then press Enter to change
the setting to on. When both fields are on, press F1: Method Parameters.
You will be prompted to type your password and then press Enter. Press the
method test key of the first method you want to edit and use the arrow keys to
highlight the first autodilute volume field. Use the tables on the pages that
follow to input the proper autodilute volume for each sample type. Press F4:
Store Param's or F5: Store & Print before exiting or choosing the next
method.
When an Autodilute test begins processing, it triggers the Sample Alert key
on the touchscreen to turn yellow. Pressing the alert key lets you observe the
progress of the test.
6-35
Customizing
Recommended
AD Sample
Volume (L)
CA
2.5
3, 4
GLU
1.5
GLUC
1.5
MALB
17
8.5
UCFP
10
AMPH 300
3.0
semi-quantitative only
AMPH 500
3.0
semi-quantitative only
AMPH 1000
1.7
semi-quantitative only
BARB
10
5.0
semi-quantitative only
BENZ
10
5.0
semi-quantitative only
COC 150
12
6.0
semi-quantitative only
COC 300
12
6.0
semi-quantitative only
EXTC 300
13
6.5
semi-quantitative only
EXTC 500
4.0
semi-quantitative only
METH
3.0
semi-quantitative only
OPI 300
12
2.0
semi-quantitative only
OPI 300
12
4.0
semi-quantitative only
OPI 2000
1.5
semi-quantitative only
PCP
14
7.0
semi-quantitative only
THC
13
4.3
semi-quantitative only
Method
Dilution
Factor
Other Qualified
AD Sample
Volumes (L)
6-36
2006/12
Customizing
If an autodilution is not
performed for results on
these methods...
Method
ACP
Recommended
AD Sample
Volume (L)
Dilution
Factor
Other Qualified
AD Sample
Volumes (L)
24/cuvette
4.8
2, 4
ACTM
4/cuvette
AHDL
1.5
ALB
2.5
3, 4
ALC
1.5
ALDL
1.5
ALP
2.3
2, 4
ALT
35
10
3.5
2, 5, 7, 8, 12, 15
AMON
53
26
2.0
AMY
14
12
AST
40
20
2, 5, 10
BUN
1.5
CA
1.7
2, 4
CCRP
12
CHOL
1.5
14
2, 3, 4, 9
CK
Standard
Sample
Volume (L)
CRBM
CREA
20
10
CTNI
DBI
CRP
a
DBIL
1.5
5, 8, 15
1.5
50
20
2.5
10
31
10
3.1
5, 15
FERR
40
20
FPSAa
60
10
GENT
1.5
GGT
32
16
4, 8, 14, 18, 20
GLU
1.5
1.5
GLUC
a,b,c
HCG
40
IBCT
25
12
2.0
IGA
10
5.0
IGG
10
5.0
200
6-37
Customizing
Method
Standard
Sample
Volume (L)
Recommended
AD Sample
Volume (L)
Dilution
Factor
Other Qualified
AD Sample
Volumes (L)
IGM
10
5.0
IRON
40
14
2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10
LA
LDH
a,b,c
LHCG
40
200
LIDO
LMMB
60
30
LTNIa
50
20
2.5
MMBa
60
30
MYO
20
10
PHNO
LIP
a
PHOS
1.5
PTN
SAL
15
8, 10
T4
16
3, 5, 7, 10
TBI
10
TBIL
28
14
4, 7, 20
TGL
THEO
TOBR
1.5
15
1.9
5, 7, 10
TPSA
40
TRIG
TSH
60
30
UCFP
10
URCA
17
3.4
VALP
1.5
TP
a
20
2.5
3,4
- HM methods.
- The HCG and LHCG methods use an additional 10-fold dilution prior to taking the autodilute
sample. Therefore, a 2-L autodilute sample for HCG or LHCG is equivalent to a 1:200 dilution.
The instrument automatically does the calculations for you.
- For autodiluted HCG and LHCG results >200,00 mIU/mL [IU/L], prepare a manual dilution and
enter the appropriate dilution factor on the Enter Sample Data screen. The instrument does the
calculations automatically for you.
6-38
2006/12
Customizing
If you want to use a Dade Behring Inc. approved reduced sample volume for
any of the following methods, you must enter the Recommended AD Sample
Volume from the table below in the serum/plasma portion of the Auto Dilute
Vols field on the methods Method Parameters screen.
Method
Reduced
Sample
Volume (L)
Recommended
AD Sample
Volume (L)
Dilution
Factor
ALT
20
10
AMY
10
AST
20
10
CREA
15
10
1.5
DBIL
13
1.9
GGT
15
10
1.5
IRN
25
N/A
N/A
TBIL
12
TP
10
URCA
10
2006/12
6-39
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
PROCESS CONTROL MENU
Fluid: SERUM
Tests: 72
Interval: 70 - 100
In : 72 - 100.0 %
Expected Mean:
SD:
Out : 0 - 0.0 %
Actual Mean: 88.2
SD: 5.39
Rule: HIGH / LOW Interval
Marker: (
RESULT
1
2
3
4
5
6
ERROR
85
85
86
87
84
86
LOT
SAMPLE ID
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
Units: mg/dL
CV:
%
)
DATE
12:15 Jan 15
12:12 Jan 15
12:11 Jan 15
12:10 Jan 15
12:08 Jan 15
12:06 Jan 15
F5: QC / PATIENT
F8: PRINT
302264S-017
1
2
Crossover QC results can
also be selected for
review!
To view crossover QC results:
1 Press F1: Set Period/Lot.
2 Type an asterisk (*) followed
by the letters XQC.
3 Press Enter.
From the Method Review screen, press a test key on the keyboard to
display results for a method.
Check the time period and specific lot shown on the first line of this
screen. Change these entries to view the specific results set that you want.
Field
Fluid
[Time Period]
To return to viewing
non-crossover QC results:
1 Press F1: Set Period/Lot.
2 Type an asterisk (*).
3 Press Enter.
To see results for a specific time period in days, type the number of
the days, e.g., 14, and press Enter.
To see results for a specific time period in hours, type the percent
symbol and the number of hours, e.g., %16 and press Enter.
(Specific Lot)
Press F1: Set Period/Lot and type an asterisk (*) followed by the lot
ID number and press Enter. To return to viewing results for all lots of
the method, press F1: Set Period/Lot, type an asterisk (*) and press
Enter.
Press F3 to select the view of this information you want to see. Three
views are available: a Result listing, a Histogram plot, and a LeveyJenningstype plot. Continue pressing F3 to move from one view to
another.
For more information on using the Method Review screen, refer to the three
views of the data and discussions of fields and function keys on the pages that
follow.
6-40
2006/12
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
RESULT
1
2
3
4
5
6
Printing to an external
printer?
Entering a y to the all QC
information for all levels and
methods data will print out in
a neatly arranged, standard
80-column formatted report.
2006/12
Fluid: SERUM
Tests: 72
Interval: 70 - 100
In : 72 - 100.0 %
Expected Mean:
SD:
Out : 0 - 0.0 %
Actual Mean: 88.2
SD: 5.39
Rule: HIGH / LOW Interval
Marker: (
ERROR
85
85
86
87
84
86
LOT
SAMPLE ID
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
Units: mg/dL
CV:
%
)
DATE
12:15 Jan 15
12:12 Jan 15
12:11 Jan 15
12:10 Jan 15
12:08 Jan 15
12:06 Jan 15
F5: QC / PATIENT
F8: PRINT
302264S-017
The Results Listing view can show patient or QC results depending on what
type of fluid is selected. The Results Listing view contains the following
fields:
Field
Meaning
Result
Error
Lot
The lot ID of the Flex reagent cartridge used to process the test.
Sample ID
ID of the sample.
Date
If Fluid Type is
To Print
Patient
QC
6-41
Customizing
Fluid: SERUM
Tests: 72
Interval: 70 - 100
In : 72 - 100.0 %
Expected Mean:
SD:
Out : 0 - 0.0 %
Actual Mean: 88.2
SD: 5.39
Rule: HIGH / LOW Interval
Marker: (
Units: mg/dL
CV:
%
)
9
6
3
0
75
79
83
87
91
95
99
103
F2:
F5: QC / PATIENT
F8: PRINT
302264S-016
To print the entire screen, hold down the Control key and press the letter P.
Both of these printouts can only be printed by the system printer; they will
not print to an external printer.
6-42
2006/12
Customizing
Fluid: SERUM
Tests: 72
Interval: 70 - 100
In : 72 - 100.0 %
Expected Mean:
SD:
Out : 0 - 0.0 %
Actual Mean: 88.2
SD: 5.39
Rule: HIGH / LOW Interval
Marker: (
112.3
105.2
98.1
91.0
83.9
76.8
Units: mg/dL
CV:
%
)
+
+
+
+ + +++
+
+ ++++
+
+
+ + ++ +
+
+ ++ + +
+ + + ++ +
++++
++
69.7
F5: QC / PATIENT
F8: PRINT
302264S-013
Press F5: QC/Patient until a patient fluid appears in the Fluid field.
A green + is a result that is within the values in the Interval field.
A red x is a result that is outside the values in the Interval field.
A blue * is a result that has been deleted by the user.
To see the result value and date for a specific point, press the right or left
arrow key to move a marker onto the point. The data for that point will
appear in the Marker field. A greater-than or less-than sign after the date
in this field indicates that the point exceeds (>) or is lower than (<) the
limits shown in the Interval field.
To print the entire screen (all data points will be printed), hold down the
Control key and press the letter P.
Both of these printouts only use the system printer; they will not print to an
external printer.
2006/12
6-43
Customizing
Tests:
In :
Out :
Rule:
50
Interval: 76.4 - 86.4
40 - 80.0 %
Expected Mean:
SD:
10 - 20.0 %
Actual Mean: 81.3
SD: 6.39
HIGH / LOW Interval
Marker: (
100.5
94.1
87.7
81.3
74.9
68.6
62.2
+
++
+ + +++
+
+ ++++
+
+
+ + ++ +
+ ++ + +
+ + + ++ ++
++++
++
Units: mg/dL
CV: 7.9 %
)
+2sd
-2sd
F5: QC / PATIENT
F8: PRINT
302264S-015
From the Histogram Plot view, press F3: See L-J Plot (or from the L-J
Patients Results view, press F5: QC/Patient until a QC fluid appears in
the Fluid field).
Press F5: QC/Patient until a QC fluid appears in the Fluid field.
A green + is a result that does not violate the rule in the Rule field.
A red x is a result that violates the rule in the Rule field.
A blue asterisk * is a result that has been deleted by the user.
The mean for the data appears as a solid line in the center of the plot and
its value is listed on the scale at the left side of the plot. The dashed lines
above and below the mean are lines of standard deviation (either 1 SD,
2 SD, or 3 SD).
The values shown on the scale at the left side of the plot are 1, 2, and
3 SD based on the value shown in the SD field at the top of the screen.
For example, the mean shown in the screen above is 81.3 and the SD is
6.39; therefore the scale has 1 SD or 87.7 (81.3 + 6.39) and 74.9 (81.3
6.39) respectively as its next values.
To see the result value and date for a specific point, press the right or left
arrow key to move a marker onto the point. The data for that point will
appear in the Marker field. A greater-than or less-than sign after the date
in this field indicates that the point exceeds (>) or is lower than (<) the
limits shown in the Interval field.
To print other SD plots that you have created on the screen, hold down the
Control key and press the letter P.
Any deleted results on these printouts will appear as either an up or down
arrow, depending on whether the deleted result was above or below 2 SD.
Both of these printouts only use the system printer; they will not print to an
external printer.
6-44
2006/12
Customizing
Fluid: SerumQC1
Tests: 72
Interval: 70 - 100
In : 72 - 100.0 %
Expected Mean:
SD:
Out : 0 - 0.0 %
Actual Mean: 88.2
SD: 5.39
Rule: HIGH / LOW Interval
Marker: (
RESULT
ERROR
LOT
SAMPLE ID
Units: mg/dL
CV: 6.1 %
)
DATE
Field
Meaning
Fluid
[ dates ]
Time period brackets. If there is nothing entered in the brackets, all results
in the test result buffer for the method and fluid combination appear on the
screen. If the brackets contain a time period, only the results for that time
period are shown on the screen.
If a time period is entered, all screens (patient and QC) will display only
results that fall within this time period. This time period will remain in use on
all Method Review screens until you delete it or change it. Use F1: Set
Period/Lot as discussed under Method Review ScreenFunction Keys
later in this module to enter a time period in this field.
( lot ID )
2006/12
Tests
The total number of results in the test result buffer that match the method
and fluid on the screen (and, if specified, are within the specific time frame
or are for the specific reagent cartridge lot ID or crossover QC).
(Tests) In
The number and percentage of results in the Tests field that are within the
Interval field shown on the screen.
(Tests) Out
The number and percentage of results in the Tests field that are outside the
Interval field shown on the screen.
6-45
Customizing
Field
Meaning
Interval
The interval to which results are compared to determine the numbers and
percentages shown in the In and Out fields.
When a patient fluid is selected, the interval from the Method Parameters
screen for that method and fluid appears. When a QC fluid is selected, the
interval from the Quality Control Ranges screen for that method and fluid
appears.
This interval field can be changed using F4: Set Interval as discussed
under Method Review ScreenFunction Keys later in this module.
6-46
Units
Results units. These units are taken from the Method Parameters screen
for the method.
Expected Mean
Value only appears when QC results are selected. The value that appears
(if any) was entered by the operator on the Quality Control Ranges screen.
The expected mean is typically based on historical laboratory studies
conducted on that method. See Entering QC Ranges later in this module.
Expected SD
Value only appears when QC results are selected. The value that appears
(if any) was entered by the operator on the Quality Control Ranges screen.
The expected SD is typically based on historical laboratory studies
conducted on that method. See Entering QC Ranges later in this module.
Actual Mean
The actual mean is calculated using all the Tests field results. (It is not
calculated using only the In field results.)
Actual SD
The actual standard deviation is calculated using all the Tests field results.
(It is not calculated using only the In field results.)
CV %
The coefficient of variation percentage is calculated using all the Tests field
results. (It is not calculated using only the In field results.)
Rule
The rule or constraint against which the results are compared. Each result
is compared to the Interval field to determine whether it exceeds or is below
the interval. This field is always High/Low Interval for patient results. For
QC results, in addition to High/Low Interval, one of six Shewhart Rules
can be selected. See a list of these rules and their meanings in Rules Field
Definitions later in this module.
Marker: ( )
This field contains the result and the date of the result corresponding to the
position of the marker on Levey-Jenningslike plots. See the LeveyJennings Plots discussion earlier in this module.
2006/12
Customizing
Used to enter a specific time period in the brackets [ ] and a specific reagent
cartridge lot ID in the parentheses ( ) fields in the upper right-hand corner of
the screen. For more information, see Method Review ScreenFields
earlier in this module.
QC Results
Patient Results
QC Results
F3: See Data (or F3: See Histogram or F3: See L-J Plot)
Patient Results
Used to display the results as either a list, a histogram, or a LeveyJenningslike plot. You must go through these views in sequence (i.e., you
cannot go from the Data screen to the L-J plot without going through the
histogram view).
QC Results
2006/12
QC Results
6-47
Customizing
F5: QC/Patient
Patient Results
QC Results
QC Results
Used to toggle result units between mAUs and concentration units. When
mAUs are selected, the Interval field will always be 0.0 9999.9. (The mAU
information is typically used for troubleshooting.)
QC Results
QC Results
Used to change the Rule field selection. There are seven possible rule
selections, six of which are Shewhart Rules. For a definition of these rules,
see Rules Field Definitions on the next page.
F8: Print
Patient Results
Used to print out the results information appearing at the top of the screen
using the system printer. (This will not print to an external printer.)
1 Press F8: Print.
2 Answer the prompt with a Y to print out only the information listed at the
top of the screen, or with an N to print out a report that contains all the
individual results in that methods test results buffer on this instrument.
3 Press Enter.
QC Results
6-48
2006/12
Customizing
Meaning
High/Low Interval
Any result that falls outside the range listed on the Quality Control
Ranges screen for that fluid.
Any result that falls outside 2 standard deviations from the mean.
This is termed a warning rule and requires further evaluation to
judge whether the data presents a problem.
Any result that falls outside 3 standard deviations from the mean. A
violation of this rule suggests systematic error.
ten consecutive
above/below mean
2006/12
6-49
Customizing
Reminder:
Patient results cannot be
deleted!
There is a connection
between the QC Results
Listing screen and the
QC L-J plot view!
Any deleted/undeleted result
made while at the Results
Listing screen will also be
deleted/undeleted on the L-J
plot view and vice versa.
The result will appear on the
Results Listing screen with an
asterisk (*) in the far left
column of the display to
indicate that it has been
deleted by the user (if the
deleted result also violates the
current rule shown on the
display, a > will appear in the
left column if the result
exceeds the rule or a < will
appear if the result is lower
than the rule).
A deleted result will not be
used in any of the calculations
shown at the top of the screen.
Therefore, when a result is
deleted, the Tests, In, Out,
Actual Mean, Actual SD, and
% CV fields will change
accordingly.
Reviewing QC Results
When reviewing QC results, you may want to view the data without including all of the data points. You can delete specific QC results.
Any deleted results are not included in or used to calculate the values in the
fields at the top of a Method Review QC screen. These results are not permanently deleted from the QC test result buffer, so they can be undeleted.
Delete a result using the Results Listing screen:
1 Move the cursor to the result and then press F2: Delete Result.
An asterisk (*) on the screen to indicate that the result is now deleted.
Only Bottom Portion of Display Shown
4
5
6
EA3129
EA3129
EA3129
87
84
86
* indicates
12:10 Jan 15
12:08 Jan 15
12:06 Jan 15
MR1A
MR1A
MR1A
a deleted result
302264S-020
To undelete a deleted result, move the cursor to the result and press F2:
Un-Delete.
A yellow asterisk (*) will appear on the screen to indicate that the result
is now deleted.
100.5
94.1
87.7
81.3
74.9
68.6
+
+
+
+ + +++
+
+ ++++
+
+
+ + ++ +
+ ++ + +
+ + + ++ ++
++++
++
+2sd
-2sd
62.2
100.5
94.1
87.7
81.3
74.9
68.6
62.2
+
++
+ + +++
+
+ ++++
+
+
+ + ++ +
+ ++ +
+ + + ++ ++
+++
+
*
+
+
-2sd
6-50
+2sd
302264S-019
To undelete a deleted result, move the cursor to the result and press
F2: Un-Delete.
When a result is undeleted, it is compared against the current rule in the
Rule field and will become a red x or a green + accordingly.
2006/12
Customizing
HIL Feature
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
H
Hemoglobin (mg/dL)
H 25
25 < H 50
50 < H 200
200 < H 300
300 < H 500
500 < H 1000
I
Bilirubin (mg/dL)
I2
2<I5
5 < I 20
20 < I 40
40 < I 60
60 < I 80
L
Intralipid (mg/dL)
L 25
25 < L 50
50 < L 200
200 < L 600
600 < L 1000
1000 < L 3000
The following general conditions are required for HIL to be run automatically:
sample must be serum or plasma
sample must be undiluted (dilution does not eliminate spectral interference)
operating mode must be set to ON or AUTO-ON
if the operating mode is AUTO-ON, Alert Index values between 2 and 6
must be entered in the HIL Setup screen
Sample Mode must be primary tube, bar code tube, sample cup or SSC
(as specified in the selected operating mode)
HIL will not run automatically in the "limited cup - no level sense" and
"PED tube" mode (sample volume may be limited)
2006/12
6-51
Customizing
HIL Setup
To set up the HIL feature, you must select an Operating Mode. Your choices
for Operating Mode are explained below. If the mode is "AUTO-ON -Tubes,
Cups, SSC's" or "AUTO-ON -Tubes, Cups", you must also enter HIL Alert
Index values.
WARNING: As with any sample run on the Dimension clinical chemistry
system, the operator must ensure that there is enough sample in
the sample container to run not only the requested tests but also
any subsequent reflex tests that may be automatically run.
OPERATING MENU
PROCESS CONTROL MENU
HIL Setup
L
-----
Method
----------AST
BUN
C3
C4
CA
CHOL
CK
CKMB
CRBM
CREA
H
-----
I
-----
L
-----
F2: STORE
F4: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200209_6-46
6-52
2006/12
Customizing
Press F1: Next Mode to display the Operating Mode that best suits your
laboratory's needs, then press F2: Store.
Operating Modes
2006/12
AUTO-ON -Tubes,
Cups, SSC's
ON
OFF
6-53
Customizing
6-54
When you have entered all desired HIL Alert Index values, press
F2: Store.
To view a list of methods and HIL Alert Index values:
press F5: Show All to display all HIL eligible methods
press F5: Show Active to display only methods with stored alert
indexes
To print a list of methods and HIL Alert Index values, press F4: Print.
2006/12
Customizing
Patient Name
Sample ID
Position
Samp Available In
James Smith
A Harris
Fran Day
02030405
21232529
22332288
A2
A1
A3
NOW
24 minutes
Not Started
F2: EDIT/RERUN
F6:
F7:
2006/12
6-55
Customizing
OFF
OFF
Alert when a STAT sample is avaialbe but has an error with no result
OFF
Alert when a STAT has been entered but not run in a specified time
OFF
120
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200209_6-48
6-56
Move the cursor to the desired field. Press the Enter key until your
choice is displayed or type the required number for time fields, then press
Enter. When finished, press Exit.
Field
Choices
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
2006/12
Customizing
LOT NUMBER
ALERT AT
XX3009
XZ2299
XY3036
ZX3068
TESTS LEFT
10
240
161
161
5
240
60
100
F2:
F3:
F4: PRINT
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Max200209_2-41
This screen shows the number of tests available for each configured test
method, in addition to the "Alert At" number. When the number of tests
available is equal to or less than the Alert At number, the Supplies alert key
changes color to yellow.
To configure a test method for the Supplies alert:
1 From the Reagent Cartridge Alerts screen, press F1: Config Alerts.
Put Up
--------15
20
30
120
30
30
90
60
15
20
Alrt At
--------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Method
---------AMY
AST
BARB
BENZ
BUN
C3
C4
CA
CHOL
CK
Put Up
---------60
90
20
20
120
30
30
60
60
120
Alrt At
--------0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Method
---------CKMB
COC
CRBM
CREA
CRP
CSA
CTNI
DBIL
DGNA
DGTX
Put Up
--------30
20
20
120
30
20
30
40
20
20
F3: PRINT
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
Alrt At
-------0
20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max200209_6-50b
2006/12
Move the cursor to the "Alrt At" field for the test method you want to
configure. Type the number of tests. Press the Enter key.
If the "Alrt At" number is zero, the Supplies alert will not apply to the
method.
When you are finished configuring methods, press F1: Store Alerts.
6-57
Customizing
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Max7.4 QC08
Configuring QC Alerts
1 Press the QC Alert key. On the screen that appears, press F4: config
Alerts.
CONFIGURE QC ALERTS
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
120
Max7.4 QC03
6-58
2006/12
Customizing
EDIT Panel 1:
VIEW Panel 2:
F5: PRINT
F6:
F7:
F8:
101614E-383
To remove a test
from the panel:
1 Move the cursor to the test.
2 Press F4: Delete Test.
2006/12
6-59
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
PRINTER SET UP
External Printer:
6-60
OFF LINE
2 cm
10
Mode: PARALLEL
F5:
F7:
Use the Printer Set Up screen to create a report title, set system printer
report printout specifications, and configure the printer(s).
Field
Explanation
Report Title
System Printer
Enter how many test result lines will appear in all test
reports.
External Printer
Mode
2006/12
Customizing
PRINTER SET UP
LINE
[
[
[
]
]
]
10
20
30
[
[
[
40
COLUMN
]
]
]
50
[
[
[
60
]
]
]
70
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
The system software has a default report layout with preset column and line
values to create a suitable report. This default layout is designed based on an
80-column format. Try this layout with your external printer and see it if it
meets your needs. To select this default report layout, press F1: Default
Setup and then F8: Store Changes.
2006/12
6-61
Customizing
The date and time the report was printed are placed on the last line of the
label.
LABEL
[ Hospital
[ Address
[ Day, Date, Time of Report
]
]
]
LINE
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
COLUMN
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
The Label section fields can be chosen from any information on the Enter
Sample Data screen.
LABEL
LINE
[ Patient Name: ] [ ]
[ Patient ID:
] [ ]
[ Sample Number: ] [ ]
[ Location:
] [ ]
[ Sample Fluid:
] [ ]
[ Priority:
] [ ]
[ Entered:
] [ ]
[ Segment:
] [ ]
[ Position:
] [ ]
[ Dilution:
] [ ]
COLUMN
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
COLUMN
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
This section consists of only two lines; both use the same Line and Column
positioning data. This section sets the headers for the data.
[
[
Test Name
Result
Ref. Interval
LINE
COLUMN
[ ]
[ ]
Units
]
]
The Data Item column contains results information that can be selected for
the report.
DATA ITEM
"CHEMISTRY"
"TEST"
"RESULT"
"HI/LO"
"REF. INTERVAL"
"UNITS"
(LENGTH)
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
COLUMN
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
The field Chemistry means that the full name of the method (i.e., Triglyceride) will be printed on the report; the field Test means that the method
abbreviation (e.g., TRIG) will appear on the report.
The remaining fields are self-explanatory.
6-62
2006/12
Customizing
]
]
]
LINE
[3]
[4]
[5]
COLUMN
[ 20]
[ 20]
[ 20]
COLUMN
[22]
[57]
[22]
[57]
[22]
[57]
[22]
[57]
[22]
[57]
[
[
Test Name
Result
Ref. Interval
LINE COLUMN
[13]
[ 3]
Units
]
]
(LENGTH)
[25]
[ 4]
[ 6]
[ 2]
[13]
[ 6]
COLUMN
[ 3]
[ -1]
[30]
[42]
[47]
[66]
216127A-035
Use spaces!
The ^^^^ in the illustration
indicate spaces added using
the space bar to center the
titles.
2006/12
Lines
Columns
3
10
20 22
30
45 47
57
66
1 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
2 +
+
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^Hospital
4 +
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ Address
5 +
^^^^^^^Tue Jan 12 06:49:20 1999
6 +
7 + Patient Name:
100
Patient ID:
8 + Sample Number: 0305010
Location:
9 + Sample Fluid:
SERUM
Priority:
ROUTINE
10 + Entered:
06:44 Jan 12, 1999
Wheel:
11 + Position:
Dilution:
12 +
13 +
Test Name
Result
Ref. Interval
Units
+
+ Glucose
85.00
70.00 - 110.00
mg/dL
+ Creatinine
7
7-18
mg/dL
+
6-63
Customizing
Quality Control
Quality control (QC) is a system of checks to ensure that the instrument and
all of the associated materials meet with your laboratorys acceptable standards of performance. At Dade Behring Inc., quality control is carried out
through all phases of reagent and instrument production and assembly. This
ensures product quality and performance.
Your laboratory is responsible for the proper functioning of the Dimension
RxL Max clinical chemistry system after installation. Dade Behring Inc.
representatives assist in setting up the instrument and ensure that the methods
to be used initially are calibrated and verified.
6-64
2006/12
Customizing
Daily QC
You should check the Dimension system daily for proper performance by
general procedures such as the System Check procedure and by performing
routine maintenance as scheduled and described in Module 3: Maintaining.
Each day you should also run two levels of quality control material of known
activity or concentration for each method you will run during that day.
Record the results of all control samples. If the results are outside your
laboratorys acceptable limits, the cause should be investigated immediately.
QC Materials
The quality control material used should not be the same material that was
used to calibrate or verify a method. This could cause an undetected error and
lead to inaccurate results.
Each new quality control product or new lot of quality control material
introduced should be evaluated in conjunction with the old lot during a trial
period. This allows the newly established mean ( X ) and standard deviation
(SD) to be compared to the values of the old material.
2006/12
6-65
Customizing
METHOD
-----------CHOL
RESULT
-------------LOW
REAG LOT
--------------XX6365
QC LEVEL
--------------SerumQC3
PRODUCT NAME
------------------------BioRad Lipochk
QC LOT
----------BLK9237
F2: EDIT/RERUN
F8: PRINT
Max7.4 QC01
6-66
Error
Explanation
Expired
Error
High
Low
>2SD
2006/12
Customizing
This table explains the tasks you can perform with the QC Alert function
keys:
2006/12
Key
Task
To view QC result, highlight the method and press this key. (See
"Displaying Test Results" in Module 2: Using.)
F2: Edit/Rerun
To rerun the QC, highlight the method and press this key, (See
Editing and Rerunning a Sample in Module 2: Using.)
To clear an alert without rerunning the QC, highlight the method and
press this key.
To group alerts with the same product definition, press this key. (See
Grouping QC Alerts later in this chapter.)
F8: Print
6-67
Customizing
Defining QC Products
To display this screen, press the QC Alert key on the touchscreen, then press
F5: Define QC Product.
DEFINE QC PRODUCTS
QC PRODUCT NAME
------------------------------
PROD
LEV
--------
QC FLUID
QC LOT
LEVEL
---------------- --------------
FLUID
-----------------
ACTIVE
QC CAL
--------------
Tests:
F7: STORE
F8: PRINT
Max7.4 QC02
If a barcode label for the product is available, scan it, then use the function keys to change the default values as appropriate. Press F7: Store.
If no barcode label is available, skip to step 2.
2 Type the QC product name and press Enter.
3 Type the product level and press Enter.
4 Type the QC Lot number. Press Enter.
5 Use F3: Next QC Fld Lev to select a QC Level.
6 Use F4: Next Fluid to select the fluid appropriate for the product.
7 Change the Active QC and Cal fields if this product will be active for
daily QC and current calibrations. Press Enter.
8 Use the test keys to enter methods associated with the product.
9 Press F7: Store.
To enter additional levels of the product, change the Level and Fluid fields
and press F7: Store.
6-68
2006/12
Customizing
Editing QC Products
1 Display the Edit QC Products screen.
OPERATING MENU
QC STATUS
EDIT QC PRODUCTS
QC PRODUCT
--------------------------BioRad CSF
BioRad CSF
BioRad Lipochk
BioRad Lipochk
BioRad Lipochk
BioRad Lipochk
BioRad URINE
BioRad URINE
PROD
LEV
-------2
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
QC LOT
----------------CSF0921
CSF0921
BLK9237
BLK9237
BLK9237
BLK9237
URN09214
URN09214
LEVEL
-----------------SerumQC3
SerumQC3
SerumQC1
SerumQC1
SerumQC2
SerumQC2
SerumQC3
SerumQC1
FLUID
------------------CSF/WHOLE BL
CSF/WHOLE BL
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
SERUM
URINE
URINE
NUMBR
METHS
---------1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ACTIVE
QC
CAL
---------------NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
F4: SEARCH
F8: PRINT
Max 7.4 QC04
2006/12
Highlight the product you want to edit and use the appropriate function
keys to make changes.
Key
Function
F4: Search
F8: Print
6-69
Customizing
Grouping QC Alerts
Use the QC Groups screen to combine methods with the same assigned QC
product and active QC alert into one sample ID and cup. Using this feature
lets you run QC on a maximum number of methods in a minimum number of
cups.
1 Press the QC Alert key.
2 Press F6: Group Alerts.
QC GROUPS
SAMP ID
---------------------------
QC LEVEL
----------------SerumQC1
QC PRODUCT
-------------------------------------Sample LYTE product
Sample CREA GLU pro
QC FLUID
---------------SERUM
VOLUME
-------------40 uL
METHODS
------------------------------------------------------------LYTE
GLU CREA
F8: PRINT
Max7.4 QC05
3
4
5
6
7
8
6-70
2006/12
Customizing
When your test results are complete, the QC status for that method becomes
valid, and the QC expiration time period begins. If you dont process another
QC sample before the QC expiration time period is up, the QC status for that
method expires.
Using the Quality Control Status List screen, you can define the QC expiration time period. For example, if you set the QC expiration time period for
CKMB to 24 hours, the QC status of each lot of CKMB on the system will
expire every 24 hours unless another CKMB QC sample is processed. An
expired QC causes the QC Alert key on the touchscreen to change to yellow.
Crossover QC
Before using a new lot of QC material, you will want to perform crossover
QC tests on it. If you give a sample of the new lot of QC material a crossover
QC priority (XQC) on the Enter Sample Data screen, the system will give
you results for the sample that you can use to calculate your new QC ranges
for the new lot. However, since the system does not compare these crossover
QC results to the QC ranges of the current lot number of QC material, these
results will not affect the QC status of the method. Crossover QC results are
stored in the Method Review files.
Reminder!!!
Processing QC samples
for Urine Drugs of Abuse
methods...
You must follow the QC
procedure in the Urine Drugs
of Abuse Supplement located
in the Method Insert Sheets
binder behind the tab that
contains all the urine drugs of
abuse methods on it.
2006/12
6-71
Customizing
Entering QC Ranges
Use this screen to enter or modify the applicable QC ranges for a method.
OPERATING MENU
Method :
Units :
LEVEL
LOW
SerumQC1
SerumQC2
SerumQC3
UrineQC1
UrineQC1
MEAN
HIGH
SD
F3: QC STATUS
F6:
F7:
F8:
302045A-359
From the Quality Control Ranges screen, press the test key for the
method you want to edit.
When you press the Lytes or Na/K test key, the Na method appears.
Press F1: Next Method to see the K and Cl methods.
For each QC level, enter the QC range (low and high), expected mean, or
expected SD as appropriate.
The number of QC levels that you use determines how many days of QC
data can be stored in the software for a method.
QC levels set
for each method
Days of QC results
stored for each method
270 days
180 days
135 days
108 days
6-72
2006/12
Customizing
QC EXPIRES
LOT
ACP
ALB
CA5066
EA5122
ALP
ALT
AMON
AMY
CB5080
LA5340
AST
BUN
CA
07:36
07:59
08:00
08:00
PERIOD (HRS)
24
24
Apr 3
Mar 24
Apr 7
Apr 17
24
24
24
08:00 Apr 6
08:00 Apr 15
08:00 Apr 17
24
24
24
08:00 Apr 3
08:00 Apr 3
24
F1:
F2:
F3: QC RANGES
F6:
F7:
F8:
101614E-357
2006/12
Checking QC Status
An asterisk (*) to the left of the QC Expires column (see the ALB method on
the screen above) indicates that the QC for that reagent lot has expired.
6-73
Customizing
Defining QC Panels
Use this screen to create up to 50 different QC panel definitions. Each definition is associated with a specific sample number, levels, fluids and methods.
Panels are designed to run in short sample cups (SSC) placed on barcoded
tubes. Only SSCs can be placed in tubes. Cups are not supported.
When an SSC with a panel ID is processed, the system:
queries the LIS, if configured for the ID
searches the QC panel database for a match
To define QC panels, display the Define QC Panels screen.
OPERATING MENU
DEFINE QC PANELS
SAMPLE ID
----------------------
QC PRODUCT NAME
QC LOT
---------------------------------- ---------------
QC FLUID
LEVEL
----------------
PRIORITY
---------------
VOL (L)
-------------
Tests:
F7: STORE
F8: PRINT
Max 7.4 QC06
To complete this screen, you can either scan a barcode label or enter data
manally.
Using Previously Defined QC Product
1 Press F6: Load from Prod to display the Select QC Product screen.
2
3
4
6-74
2006/12
Customizing
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2006/12
6-75
Customizing
Editing QC Panels
1. Display the Edit QC Panel screen.
OPERATING MENU
QC STATUS
EDIT QC PANELS
SORTED BY SAMP ID
QC FLUID
SAMPLE ID
QC PRODUCT NAME
QC LOT
LEVEL
PRIORITY
VOL (L)
-----------------------
------------------------------------
------------------
---------------
---------------
------------
1234
Bio Rad
A101
SerumQC3
QC
44555
Bio Rad
A101
SerumQC1
QC
393
767676
Bio Rad
A101
SerumQC3
QC
257
378
F4: SEARCH
F8: PRINT
Max 7.4 QC07
2. Highlight the panel you want to edit and use the appropriate function keys
to make changes.
6-76
Key
Function
F4: Search
F8: Print
2006/12
Customizing
1
2
SAMPLE ID
----------------------
QC PRODUCT NAME
QC LOT
---------------------------------- ---------------
QC FLUID
LEVEL
----------------
PRIORITY
---------------
VOL (L)
-------------
Tests:
F7: STORE
F8: PRINT
Max 7.4 QC14
3
4
5
6
7
2006/12
6-77
Customizing
RESULT MONITOR
METHOD: GLU
LIMITS
ACCUMULATED RESULTS
Monitor:
Above Mean Factor
Below Mean Factor
Mean Plus / Minus
A
------1.10
0.85
or
0 SD
B
------0.00
0.00
or
0 SD
A
0.2
0.0
B
0.0
0.0
***
***
4
0
***
***
0
0
F3:
Each Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system can collect its absorbance readings by method and lot of reagent, and then use this data to establish instrument-specific limits for that method. Any test result that exceeds
these limits on this particular Dimension instrument will generate an abnormal assay (abnl assay) flag on the test results printout. If this occurs, the
result should not be reported and the sample should be rerun. Currently, this
feature is not available for all methods.
The Result Monitor screen is divided into two sections. The left side (Limits)
is used to activate a method and to enter/change method-specific limits.
Periodically, as a result of internal testing, Dade Behring Inc. may communicate revisions to the Result Monitor limts. The right side (Accumulated
Results) will be filled in by the instrument for each method that has been
activated.
Limits Side
Includes an A column and a B column, depending on whether the methods
used one or two monitoring checks. The fields in each column define the
limit using either percentage or SD limits. Above Mean Factor numbers are
given as a percentage factor of the mean absorbance result. For example, an
upper limit of 1.20 indicates that the flag will be set if an individual results
monitor is greater than 120% of the mean. A lower limit of 0.75 indicates a
limit set at 75% of the mean. For the Mean Plus/Minus SD fields, the number
entered is the factor times the SD to define the limit around the mean. For
example, a Mean Plus/Minus SD factor of 6 indicates that the limits are 6
SDs above and below the mean absorbance value.
6-78
2006/12
Customizing
RESULT MONITOR
METHOD: GLU
LIMITS
ACCUMULATED RESULTS
Monitor:
Above Mean Factor
Below Mean Factor
Mean Plus / Minus
A
------1.10
0.85
or
0 SD
B
------0.00
0.00
or
0 SD
A
0.2
0.0
B
0.0
0.0
***
***
4
0
***
***
0
0
F3:
1
2
3
4
From the Result Monitor screen, select one of the methods that can be
used with this feature by pressing its method key or F1: Next Method.
Press F7: Method On/Off to turn the result monitor feature ON or OFF.
The Result Monitoring in Effect field will indicate the on or off status.
Press F8: Store Params.
Repeat steps 13 for each method that you want to activate or deactivate.
2006/12
6-79
Customizing
Mean SD
A
B
ACP
1.25
1.25
0.80
0.80
0.00
0.00
ALDL
1.30
0.00
0.70
0.00
0.00
0.00
ALP
1.80
0.00
0.60
0.00
0.00
0.00
ALT
1.30
0.00
0.75
0.00
0.00
0.00
AMON
1.15
1.25
0.75
0.50
0.00
0.00
AST
BUN
1.20
1.08
0.00
0.00
0.75
0.80
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
CA
0.00
1.07
0.00
0.97
5.00
0.00
CCRP
1.25
1.10
0.65
0.75
0.00
0.00
CREA
2.00
1.00
0.80
1.00
0.00
0.00
CSA*
1.20
1.30
0.90
0.70
0.00
0.00
CSAE
CTNI*
1.20
1.19
1.10
0.00
0.90
0.83
0.80
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
DBIL
1.10
3.00
0.80
0.20
0.00
0.00
ECO2
1.12
2.00
0.88
0.10
0.00
0.00
FT4*
1.13
0.00
0.87
0.00
0.00
0.00
GGT
3.50
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.00
0.00
GLU
GLUC
1.20
1.20
1.02
1.02
0.85
0.85
0.96
0.96
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
HA1C
1.50
1.15
0.85
0.80
0.00
0.00
HIL
2.50
0.00
0.60
0.00
0.00
0.00
LI
1.18
0.00
0.82
0.00
0.00
0.00
LIDO
L/PBNP
1.50
1.40
0.00
40.00
0.50
0.80
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
MALB
4.00
0.00
0.50
0.00
0.00
0.00
MG
0.00
2.00
0.00
0.85
10.00
0.00
MYO*
1.20
0.00
0.80
0.00
0.00
0.00
NAPA
1.50
1.50
0.50
0.50
0.00
0.00
PALB
PBNP*
1.05
1.40
0.00
1.50
0.95
0.80
0.00
0.20
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
PHOS
1.20
0.00
0.75
0.00
0.00
0.00
PROC
1.50
1.50
0.50
0.50
0.00
0.00
PTN
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
7.00
0.00
RCRP
1.20
1.20
0.80
0.80
0.00
0.00
TACR*
TGL
1.20
1.50
1.20
0.00
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
TP
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
10.00
0.00
TRIG
1.40
0.00
0.70
0.00
0.00
0.00
TSH
1.19
0.83
0.00
0.00
0.00
40.0
* HM method.
6-80
2006/12
Customizing
Reminder!
The system configurations
have already been set to meet
the requirements of your
laboratory during instrument
installation.
Do not change an instrument
option without approval from
your laboratory supervisor.
2006/12
F2: PRETREATS
F4: COMMUNICATIONS
F7: STORE
Use the Sample ID/Computer Menu screen to configure the Dimension RxL
Max system to the needs and operations of your laboratory as discussed
below and on the following pages. After making changes, press F7: Store
before exiting this screen.
There are four distinct portions of the Sample ID/Computer Menu screen:
Segmented Wheel Setup
Pediatric tube and SSC sample container configuration
Bar Code Configuration
Test Scheduling and Reporting
The Segmented Wheel Setup portion is used to indicate what information will
appear automatically on the Enter Sample Data screen.
The PED/SSC sample container configuration portion is used to indicate the
inside diameter of the PED tube or of the SSC container and, if desired, to
designate those segments that will primarily be used with each type. The
inside diameter must be entered before you can assign these segments.
The Bar Code Configuration portion is used to read and interpret the bar code
system used by your laboratory and to set certain instrument actions when the
bar code is read.
The Test Scheduling and Reporting portion is used to define information
about test priority scheduling and test reporting on the instrument.
6-81
Customizing
Field
Explanation
The Mode field on blank Enter Sample Data screens will default
to this. Use F8: Next Setting to select other modes.
Default Fluid
The Fluid field on blank Enter Sample Data screens will default
to this entry. Use F8: Next Setting to select other fluids.
Sample Edit
SSC
6-82
2006/12
Field
Customizing
Explanation
Test Scheduling/Reporting
STAT tests are always
run first...
Schedule Tests
Priority Panel
(schedule)
Priority Panels:
Decide how to define
these two fields depending on your specific
needs.
The Priority Panel (schedule)
and Priority Panel (report)
fields do not need to have the
same information in them. You
could define different panels
for use in each of these fields.
For example, you could define
a priority panel (schedule) of
ACP so it would be scheduled
first, and define the priority
panel (report) to be GLU and
LYTES so that these two
results print out as soon as
they are available.
2006/12
6-83
Customizing
Field
Explanation
Indicates the test panel that will be run on a bar coded sample if
the system cannot find any patient data for that sample. Use the
keyboard to enter a panel number. If you don't want to select a
default panel, enter a zero in this field.
Processing Whole Blood Samples: Do not configure a
default panel if you process whole blood samples. If you have
configured a default panel, it is strongly recommended that you
deconfigure the option to avoid the potential for inappropriately
processing the default panel tests from a whole blood sample.
Download Pretreats
Label Length
Leading Zeros
If turned ON, lets the system interpret an LIS request for test
method TCO2 as a request for test method ECO2.
6-84
If turned ON, lets the system interpret LIS requests for test
methods HCG, MMB and CTNI as requests for LHCG, LMMB,
and LTNI when you use reduced test Flex reagent cartridges
for those methods.
2006/12
Customizing
METHOD
TOTAL
RESULTS
ABS
ACP
ALB
ALC
ALP
ALT
AMON
AMY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CONDITIONAL
RESULTS
QC
CALIB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LAST
SAVED
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
TESTS SINCE
LAST SAVE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5: PRINT
F6:
F7:
Explanation
Total Results
Conditional Results
QC/Calib
Last Saved
The count that was in the Total Results column when F8: Save
Counts was last pressed.
The difference between the Total Results column and the Last
Saved column.
The date and time when F8: Save Counts was last pressed.
2006/12
Pressing F8: Save Counts will copy the Total Results count into the Last
Saved column and reset the Tests Since Last Save field to 0 (zero). Since you
are requesting the instrument to overwrite the Last Saved count, you will be
prompted with a message asking whether you want to continue.
6-85
Customizing
With the Store Laboratory Data feature, you can store QC records, patient test
results, and calibrations on preformatted DOS diskettes or, if enabled, a USB
storage device.
CAUTION! You must always use new disks for this procedure. Reusing a
disk may result in incorrect data.
The format of the stored files is compatible with the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet program so you can use the data on another computer to produce
customized reports.
The data retrieved using this feature cannot be restored to the Dimension
system and should not be considered a means of emergency backup for test
results and QC records. Always follow your labs specific procedures for the
proper storage and retention of patient test results, quality control records and
instrument printouts.
Based on your instrument's volume, you may want to establish a routine time
interval for storing data via this feature.
Perform this procedure for only one data type at a time. To store data:
1 With the instrument in Standby, display the Store Laboratory Data screen:
OPERATING MENU
F5: QC ON/OFF
STORE QC RESULTS
OFF
OFF
STORE CALIBRATIONS
OFF
6-86
2006/12
Customizing
If you are using diskettes for storage, the system calculates the size of the
file to determine whether one or multiple preformatted DOS disks will be
needed.
If the function key F1: Store Data appears, you need only one disk to
store the selected data. Continue with step 5.
If the function key F3: Str Mult Disks appears, you need more than
one disk to store the selected data. Skip to step 8.
5 Press F1: Store Data and follow the prompts to remove the Dimension
RxL Max system backup disk and insert a new preformatted DOS disk.
Then press the Enter key.
6 After the disk drive light goes out, remove the preformatted DOS disk
and reinsert the Dimension system backup disk.
7 Be sure to label the disk holding the results file.
8 If you dont want to use multiple disks, press F2: Chg Date Range. Enter
new dates to reduce the number of days covered. This should reduce the
file size to fit on one disk. Then perform steps 5 through 7. Otherwise,
continue with step 9.
9 To use multiple disks, press F3: Str Mult Disks and follow the prompts
to remove the Dimension RxL Max system backup disk and insert a
new preformatted DOS disk.
10 Press the Enter key. Prompts on the screen tell you when to insert new
preformatted DOS disks and when to reinsert the backup disk.
Be sure that the disk drive light is out before you remove a disk.
11 Label the disks holding the results files.
2006/12
6-87
6-88
Serum QC2
Serum QC2
Serum QC2
Serum QC2
Serum QC2
Serum QC2
CL
ECO2
CREA
BUN
GLU
CA
8.9
55
270
101
26
6.2
LO
HI
9.2
50
265
96
22
6.1
9.4
54 abnl assay
276
104
27
6.4
HI
hp
LO
Meth
ALB
TSH
CREA
BUN
CA
CA
ALB
AMON
GLU
BUN
Lot
BM7123
FK6280
CR7055
EM7047
BF7059
BF7059
BM7123
CN6245
CN6301
EM7047
Date
Time
6/12/2006 10:24 AM
6/12/2006 10:30 AM
6/12/2006 10:24 AM
6/12/2006 10:24 AM
6/13/2006 10:45 AM
6/13/2006 11:07 AM
6/13/2006 11:09 AM
6/13/2006 11:39 AM
6/15/2006
8:09 AM
6/15/2006
8:10 AM
Cal Product
tp/alb cal
thy cal
chem1
chem1
CHEM1 CALI
CHEM1 CALI
TP/ALB CL
AMON VERIF
CHEM1 CALI
CHEM1 CALI
55
356
8.1
Cal Lot
5ed095
3ld009
6ad039
6ad039
5JD020
5JD020
5JD024
5GN061
5JD020
5JD020
7
70
8.5
Calc Type
LINEAR
LOGIT
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
LINEAR
18 abnl assay
110
10.1
Set Up By
gk
gk
gk
gk
LB
gepLB
gep
gep
gep
gep
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
2003051256 BUN
2003051256 GLU
2003051256 CA
Patient 2
Patient 2
Patient 2
QC PROD 2
QC PROD 2
QC PROD 2
QC PROD 2
QC PROD 2
QC PROD 2
Prod Name
QC PROD 2
QC PROD 2
Units
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
mmol/L
mmol/L
mg/dL
Units
mmol/L
mmol/L
QC level
Serum QC2
Serum QC2
Method
NA
K
CD4567
EF3345
GH3355
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
Inst Type
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
DIMMAX
12345
12345
12345
Inst ID
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
Inst ID
12345
12345
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
Date
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
Date
5/2/2003
5/2/2003
9:47AM
9:47AM
9:47AM
Time
9:45AM
9:45AM
9:45AM
9:45AM
9:47AM
8:45AM
8:45AM
8:45AM
8:45AM
8:45AM
8:45AM
Time
8:45AM
8:45AM
Cal ID
Instr SN C0
0606121424.ALB.BM7123
973875
-1.8086
0606121430.TSH.FK6280
973875 -24451.12
0606121424.CREA.CR7055
973875
-0.4381
0606121424.BUN.EM7047
973875
-0.6063
0606131445.CA.BF7059
221559 -290.6962
0606131507.CA.BF7059
221559 -14.8689
0606131509.ALB.BM7123
221559
-1.446
0606131539.AMON.CN6245
221559
0.1521
0606151209.GLU.CN6301
221559
19.492
0606151210.BUN.EM7047
221559
6.1172
Flex Lot #
LYTES
LYTES
LYTES
LYTES
AB1234
GH3355
CD4567
EF3345
LYTES
LYTES
AB1234
Accepted By Mode
Operator
Operator
Operator
Operator
gep
Operator
gep
Operator
gep
Operator
gep
Operator
gep
Operator
gep
Operator
Serum
Serum
Serum
Fluid
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
ABC 12345
ABC 12345
ABC 12345
ABC 12345
ABC 12345
ABC 12345
QC Lot #
ABC 12345
ABC 12345
Customizing
Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system
2006/12
Customizing
2006/12
Method
QC level
Result
HI/LO
QC Lo
QC Hi
Error
Units
Prod Name
The name entered by the operator in the Patient Name field (on
Enter Sample Data screen) or downloaded from the LIS.
QC Lot #
The lot number entered by the operator in the Sample No. field (on
Enter Sample Data screen) or downloaded from the LIS.
Flex Lot #
Inst Type
Inst ID
Unique identifier entered in the Instrument ID field in the Communication Set Up screen.
Date
Time
6-89
Customizing
6-90
Patient Name
Sample No.
Sample number entered on the ENTER DATA screen or downloaded from LIS.
Method
Result
HI/LO hp/lp
R Lo
R Hi
Error
Units
Fluid
Flex Lot #
Inst Type
Inst ID
Unique identifier entered in the Instrument ID field in the Communication Set Up screen.
Date
Time
2006/12
Customizing
2006/12
Meth
Lot
Date
Time
Cal Product
Cal Lot
Calc Type
Set Up By
Accepted By
Mode
Cal ID
System-assigned calibration ID
Instr SN
E Coeff
esd
Trip Level
Scaler A, B, C, D
Units
Measurement units
BV #
Bottle value entered for the calibration level; this field appears
multiple times, identified by the level number it is associated with
Mean#
SD#
Standard deviation of results for the level; this field appears multiple
times, identified by the level number it is associated with
Lev#, Rep#
Result concentration replicate for the level; this field appears multiple
times, identified by the QC fluid level number it is associated with
QC Level
QC Result
QC Error#
QC out?
HB BV L3/L4
Bottle value for HB level; this field appears multiple times, identified
by the level number it is associated with
6-91
Customizing
6-92
HB SD L3/L4
Hb 3-1/4-1 Result
Result 1 for HB level; Bottle value for HB level; this field appears
multiple times, identified by the level number it is associated with
HB 3-2/4-2 Result
Result 2 for HB level; Bottle value for HB level; this field appears
multiple times, identified by the level number it is associated with
2006/12
Customizing
Reminder
The assigned key(s) for the
methods have been set to
meet the requirements of your
laboratory during instrument
installation.
Do not change the assigned
key(s) for a method without
approval from your laboratory
supervisor.
You can customize the key(s) used to select a test method by programming
keys using the Assign Method Keys screen.
The key assignment for each method in the Dimension instrument test menu
is preset in the software. However, these preset (or default) key assignments
may not be convenient to use in your laboratory because:
the laboratory does not run all these methods.
you want to group the methods you do run.
The test keys have been assigned numbers to use with the Assign Method
Keys screen. The illustration at the bottom of this page shows the number
given to each test key.
Each test key has four possible positions for assigning test methods. These
are referred to as positions 1 4. However, some positions on these test keys
cannot be customized since they already have a specific purpose. For example, Position 1 on test keys 11 15 and 26 30 is reserved for use as a
Panel key.
Position 4
TSH
Press Alt and Test Key 1 to select this test on the keyboard overlay.
Position 3
Position 2
Position 1
UCFP
ACP
ALB
Test Key 1
Keys 1-10: Four test methods
can be assigned to each of
these keys.
If your laboratory
happens to run 20 or
fewer methods on
Dimension...
You can program a test
method to position 1 on test
keys 1-10 and 16-25.
Now, you can select your
tests without having to
remember whether the Shift,
Control, or Alt key also
needs to be used.
2 3
4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Keys 16-25: Three test methods
can be assigned to each of these
keys. Position 4 cannot be used.
Follow the Programming Test Keys procedure on the next page to program
your test keys.
2006/12
6-93
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
PROCESS CONTROL MENU
PROCESS CONTROL SECONDARY
MENU
KEY ASIGNMENT
--------------------2
--------------------3
SHIFT-----------3
CONTROL-----26
--------------------4
--------------------5
CONTROL-----27
CONTROL-----28
--------------------6
CONTROL-----2
CONTROL-----3
F4: UNASSIGNED
F7: PRINT
F8: STORE
302263A-010
2
To return to the default
key assignments in the
software:
Press F6: Default Keys
4
5
6-94
Move the cursor to the method. Use the current key(s) assigned to the
method (or use the page up, page down, and arrow keys) to locate the
method.
With the method highlighted, press F5: Assign Key and then press the
new key(s) you want to assign to that method. After pressing the new
key(s), a message will appear to indicate the change you made. If your
new key assignment causes a method that you run in your laboratory to
be unassigned, you should reassign it at this time following steps 2 and 3.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to program keys for other methods
After changing the method(s), press F8: Store and enter your password
when prompted.
2006/12
Customizing
OPERATING MENU
F4:
F6:
F7:
2006/12
Press F5: Cuvt Auto Rem until the number of hours you want is displayed, The specification remains in effect until you change it to OFF or
to a different number of hours.
6-95
Customizing
PRINTER SET UP
LIP CK
CKMB AST
TIBC MG T4
F6:
F7:
2
3
From the Test Result Order screen, use the test keys to select the first test
you want to have printed on your test results printout.
The test will appear on the lower portion of the screen and also be highlighted on the top portion of the screen.
When you have finished selecting the order of tests for your test result
printout, press F1: Store Changes.
Use F8 to select how you want these tests to appear on the test result
printout. F8 toggles between Selected Ord and Sample Seq.
Press F8: Selected Ord to list your test results in the order you
selected using this procedure (Selected Order);
Press F8: Sample Seq to list them in the order in which the tests were
actually processed (Sample Sequence).
A message prompt will appear indicating which order you have selected.
6-96
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
2006/12
7-1
User-Defined Methods
7-2
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
User-Defined Methods
This section contains all the information that you need to understand
and operate the User-Defined Method feature on the Dimension RxL Max
clinical chemistry system.
It enables users to define their own methods using reagents that are not
purchased from Dade Behring Inc. Users define their methods by choosing
the characteristics that fully describe an analysis. Up to ten methods can be
defined and stored.
Dade Behring Inc. provides validated instructions for using certain Emit
assays as user-defined methods. Contact the Technical Assistance Center or
your local representative for the method-specific Application Sheet.
All methods that have been defined in User-Defined Methods are requested
for sample processing in the same way that Dade Behring methods are
requested. They can be processed along with Dade Behring methods in
random, batch, or profile modes.
Before using User-Defined Methods, you should be familiar with the basic
operation of the Dimension system because the procedures for calibrating,
performing quality control, and running patient samples are the same as for
Dade Behring Inc. methods.
To program and run a user-defined method, you will need to perform the
following 12 steps in sequence:
1. Enter the method reaction parameters on
the User-Defined Method screen.
2006/12
7-3
User-Defined Methods
Step
Procedure to Follow
Customer Responsibility
The Customer assumes all responsibility for the selection of the proper
reagents and entering the proper test parameters, use of the proper test protocol, correctness of the test results, and any associated errors or omissions.
Warranty
DADE BEHRING INC. EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
WITH RESPECT TO THIS USER-DEFINED METHODS PRODUCT
WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Since Dade Behring Inc. does not manufacture the reagents that our customers may use in the user-defined Flex reagent cartridge, the warranty for the
Dimension RxL Max clinical chemistry system does not extend to the
performance of user-defined reagents (including user-defined test results or
standard Dimension RxL Max system test results that are affected by userdefined testing), their effect on the system operation and types and frequency
of maintenance, or their effect on operator safety.
7-4
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
USER-DEFINED METHOD
Channel:
Name: X
Delivery
R1:
S1:
R2:
R3:
Photometry
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
Time
-57.6
0.0
***
***
Time
0.0
0.0
***
***
Mode: ( Absorbance
Mix
Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Chase
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
0 ul
------0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
Cartridge Configuration
1
Component:
( )
Number of Tests:
0
Well Life [hours]:
72
On Board Life: 720 hrs
)
)
)
)
2
3
4
5
6
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
0
0
0
0
0
72 72 72 72 72
Calibration: 2160 hrs
F2:
F3:
F4: STORE
F7: CALCULATION
F8: PRINT
234308A-001
1
2
3
4
2006/12
Field
Information
Channel
Name
Mode
Absorbance or Turbidimetric.
7-5
User-Defined Methods
Standard Curve
Delivery
R1:
S1:
R2:
R3:
Photometry
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
Time
-57.6
0.0
***
***
Time
0.0
0.0
***
***
Mode: ( Absorbance
Mix
Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Chase
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
0 ul
------0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
Cartridge Configuration
1
Component:
( )
Number of Tests:
0
Well Life [hours]:
72
On Board Life: 720 hrs
)
)
)
)
2
3
4
5
6
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
0
0
0
0
0
72 72 72 72 72
Calibration: 2160 hrs
F2:
F3:
F4: STORE
F7: CALCULATION
F8: PRINT
234308A-003
1
2
Reminder...
All methods must specify a
volume for at least one
component of R1.
3
4
5
6
7-6
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
R2 delivery times...
Instrument throughput will be
reduced when the R2 delivery
time is greater than 244
seconds.
Explanation
R1
S1
R2
R3
Must be at least 30 seconds later than R2 but not more than 461.3
seconds. In addition, you may not specify a time between 257.3 and
389.3 seconds. Refer to the Error Message List at the end of this
module for details on timing restrictions.
The R2 and R3 times that actually appear on the screen when you
press Enter may be a few seconds different from the times that you
entered because of the competitive scheduling of the instrument.
Component
Volume
Chase
Mix
Describes how vigorously to mix the reagent components (or sample) and
chase. GENTLE, MODERATE, STRONG, or NONE are the available
choices. The mix strength involves a combination of how long the solution is
mixed, how much energy is used, and how many pulses are applied. For
gentle mixes, the ultrasonics pulse for longer times at a lower energy level,
while strong mixes occur over a shorter time period with a higher energy
level.
When selecting a mix level you should:
be careful to prevent foaming.
consider the chemical properties (such as viscosity) of the reagent(s) and
sample.
The reagent chase volume must be at least 20 L when a reagent mix is
requested. The sample chase volume must be at least 10 L when a
sample mix is requested.
2006/12
7-7
User-Defined Methods
Time
-57.6
0.0
***
***
Time
0.0
0.0
***
***
Mode: ( Absorbance
Mix
Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Chase
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
0 ul
------0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
Cartridge Configuration
1
Component:
( )
Number of Tests:
0
Well Life [hours]:
72
On Board Life: 720 hrs
)
)
)
)
2
3
4
5
6
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
0
0
0
0
0
72 72 72 72 72
Calibration: 2160 hrs
F2:
F3:
F4: STORE
F7: CALCULATION
F8: PRINT
234308A-004
Enter a time (in seconds) for the first photometry reading (P1).
WARNING: Do not schedule a photometry reading within 10 seconds
of a reagent or sample delivery.
When defining a
photometry read time...
There must be at least 350 L
in the cuvette when any
photometic reading occurs.
7-8
Reading
Time Range
P1
30 to 675 seconds.
P2
0 (zero) to 675 seconds, but must be later than the first reading (P1).
P3
P4
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Photometry
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
Time
-57.6
0.0
***
***
Time
0.0
0.0
***
***
Mode: ( Absorbance
Mix
Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Chase
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
0 ul
------0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul ( )
0 ul
0 ul ( NONE
Cartridge Configuration
1
Component:
( )
Number of Tests:
0
Well Life [hours]:
72
On Board Life: 720 hrs
)
)
)
)
2
3
4
5
6
( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
0
0
0
0
0
72 72 72 72 72
Calibration: 2160 hrs
F2:
F3:
F4: STORE
F7: CALCULATION
F8: PRINT
234308A-005
Enter the component location for each well in the Flex cartridge by
putting the letter identification of the component under the appropriate
cartridge configuration number (well number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6) where it
is located in the Flex cartridge.
To do this, position the cursor in the parentheses under the well number
and press F1: Next Select until the proper letter appears.
Enter the number of tests for each well.
The total number of tests must be equal for each component (but not
necessarily for each well) within a Flex cartridge.
Enter the Well Life, which is the number of hours that each well will
remain stable after the well has been punctured by the reagent probe.
WARNING: The Well Life, On-Board Life, and Calibration fields should be
carefully determined prior to routine use of a user-defined
method.
4
5
Enter the On-Board Life, which is the number of hours that the Flex
cartridge remains stable after it has been placed in the instrument.
Enter how often this method must be calibrated (in hours).
WARNING: Use caution in determining the calibration life with respect to
variations in reagent preparation. Make sure that the calibration will hold from cartridge-to-cartridge.
2006/12
Do not press F4: Store. You must define the calculation to be used with
this method before storing. Continue with Defining the Calculation.
7-9
User-Defined Methods
Explanation
Component
Number of Tests
Maximum number of
tests per well...
You can assign up to 99 tests
per well in the Flex cartridge.
CARTRIDGE CONFIG
COMPONENT
NUMBER OF TESTS
20
10
10
20
6
4
3
1
Well Life
On-Board Life
Calibration
7-10
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
USER-DEFINED METHOD:
LINE #
STATEMENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
F1:
F2:
F3:
F4: ACCEPT
F5: TEMPLATE
F7:
F8:
234308A-006
2006/12
7-11
User-Defined Methods
P1:
Time:
0.0
Dilution:
0.000
P2:
Time:
0.0
Dilution:
0.000
F2:
F3:
F4: ACCEPT
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
234308A-007
7-12
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Calculation Fields
Field
Explanation
Mode
Measuring Filter
293, 340, 383, 405, 452, 510, 540, 577, 600, 700, or NONE.
Blanking Filter
293, 340, 383, 405, 452, 510, 540, 577, 600, 700, or NONE.
Depletion Factor
The instrument will calculate a P1/P2 rate and a P2/P3 rate. If these rates
differ from each other by more than a given percentage (the depletion
factor entered by the user), an absorbance error message will appear
on the printed test results. A depletion factor must be entered on threepoint calculation templates.
Dilution
2006/12
Initial Optical
Density (IOD)
Final Optical
Density (FOD)
7-13
User-Defined Methods
If an error message
appears...
7-14
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
METHOD PARAMETERS
METHOD:
Test Name:
Decimal Places:
Result Units:
Calculation: LINEAR
Standard Vol:
ul
Auto Dilute Vols: serum / plasma:
ul urine:
INTERVALS
SERUM / PLASMA
_
_
_
REFERENCE
ASSAY
PANIC
C0
CSF/BLOOD
_
_
REFLEX IF <
ul
URINE
_
_
OR >
RUN
C1
2006/12
7-15
User-Defined Methods
To fill a Flex cartridge, puncture the clear film that covers the individual
wells (as needed) and fill the wells with the appropriate volume of reagent, as
defined in the Cartridge Configuration section of the User-Defined Method
screen. To maintain reagent integrity, the clear film should not be removed and you should not attempt to reseal the punctured holes.
You must use the six-well Flex cartridge (Order Number DF99) as the
reagent vessel with User-Defined Methods. This is an empty Flex cartridge
to which you will add your own reagents. The empty Flex cartridge can be
stored at room temperature until the expiration date.
CAUTION! Use only liquid reagents! No on-board preparation is
permitted.
6
4
3
1
CAUTION!
7-16
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Mode:
KEYBOARD
ETA:
Cartridge Label:
METHOD
LOT NUMBER
SEQUENCE
For reference...
You will be using the same
process as in Manually
Entering a Reagent Cartridge
Bar Code in Module 3:
Maintaining.
F2:
F3:
F4:
F5:
F6:
F7:
F8:
240883B-340
Field
Information
Method
Enter the same name that you have already assigned to this method
on the Method Parameters screen.
Lot number
Sequence number
2006/12
7-17
User-Defined Methods
7-18
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
To Request
This User-Defined
Test Method
Press This
Key Combination
X01
Control / GGT
X02
Control / GLU
X03
Control / LDH
X04
Control / LYTES
X05
Control / NA/K
X06
Control / PHOS
X07
Control / TBIL
X08
Control / TP
X09
Control / TRIG
X10
Control / URCA
2006/12
7-19
User-Defined Methods
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
METHOD KINETICS
Method:
mA/min:
F2:
F7:
F8: PRINT
234308A-010
7-20
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Field
Explanation
Method ( )
The method name will appear in this field when you select the
method. The description 6 well for the Flex cartridge will always be
displayed within the parentheses.
Filters
1st field
Scale mAU
Time
Filename
A file name will appear in the Filename field whenever the data is
archived. For user-defined methods, the file name will always be
kinetics.ar and the system will save the most recent study. Press
F5: Archive Data to archive the data.
Marker
2006/12
dmA(x-o)
dT
mA/min
7-21
User-Defined Methods
DIAGNOSTIC MENU
METHOD KINETICS
Method:
mA/min:
F2:
F7:
F8: PRINT
234308A-010
From the Method Kinetics screen, load the sample in segment #1, position #1.
WARNING: Do not load samples/segments into the sample area if:
that segment's status box is red
the instrument is initializing and processing
the moving wheel light is lit
the message Moving Wheel . . . is in the photometric
sampler status box
Do not place your hands in the sample wheel area while the
system is initializing or processing. You could injure yourself,
be exposed to biohazards or damage the instrument.
3
4
7-22
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
2006/12
7-23
User-Defined Methods
Programming Terms
The Dimension instrument user-defined software application provides a
versatile method of specifying how raw photometric data is transformed prior
to conversion to analyte concentration through the methods standard curve.
Examples of simple transformations would include bichromatic endpoints
and two-point rates. More complex transformations would include polychromatic sums (e.g., Allen Corrections), volume-corrected blanking for endpoint
reactions, and checking for substrate depletion through comparison of early/
late reaction rates.
The capability provided by the transformation program is similar to the
functionality provided by a four-function calculator. The four common
arithmetic functionsadd, subtract, divide, multiplyare provided, as well
as parentheses. Twenty-six temporary memory registers are provided for the
storage of intermediate results. Functions are available for calculating monochromatic and bichromatic rates and endpoints from the raw photometric data
arrays.
Programming Structure
All programs must have a left brace ({) as the first character and a right brace
(}) as the last. At least one RETURN statement is required to forward
meaningful results from the calculation.
Enclosed within the braces are program statements. Statements are used to
assign intermediate results to registers, test logical conditions, set error codes,
and return transformed mAU to the system.
7-24
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Implementation
The MAU Calculation screen provides the user with 25 lines in which to
enter a transformation program. The input is in the form of a simple programming language, which provides functions to retrieve raw data from the
photometric data arrays, algebraic statements to transform that data mathematically, and test statements (if/else) that can be used to set error flags. In
addition, there are 26 registers labeled AZ that can be used for temporary
storage of intermediate results. The final result is RETURNED for input into
the standard curve transformation.
For instance, the program
1
{
2
A = BICH(P1,340NM,383NM);
3
RETURN A;
4
}
calculates a bichromatic 340383 nm endpoint. The braces { } surrounding
the calculation (lines 1 and 4) demarcate the beginning and end of the calculation, and must be included in all programs. Any text outside of these
brackets is ignored. The BICH function on line 2 calculates the bichromatic
difference observed for photometric reading P1. The value is placed in the
temporary register A, whose value is RETURNED to the system by statement
3.
Similarly, the program
1
{
2
A = RATE(P1,P2,340NM,383NM);
3
RETURN A;
4
}
calculates a bichromatic 340383 nm rate. The RATE function on line
2 calculates the rate of reaction (in mAU/min) observed between photometric
readings P1 and P2. The value is placed in the temporary register A, whose
value is RETURNED to the system by statement 3.
For these simple examples, there is no need to place the intermediate result in
register A. The endpoint program could have been written simply as:
1
{RETURN BICH(P1,340NM,383NM);}
To improve readability, statements can be broken across lines, and spaces can
be inserted:
1
{
2
RETURN
3
BICH(P1, 340NM, 383NM);
4
}
2006/12
7-25
User-Defined Methods
Statements
Statements can take any of the following forms:
register = numerical expression;
SET errorcode ERROR;
RETURN numerical expression;
{ statement1; statement2; ...; statement N; }
IF (logical expression) statement
IF (logical expression) statement ELSE statement
Examples of these types of statements appear below and on the next page.
register = numerical expression
This statement is used to assign an intermediate result to a register. Register
can be any of the 26 general registers A,B,C...X,Y,Z. Numerical expressions
are described later.
SET errorcode ERROR
This statement is used to set error codes on the report slip. Accepted values
for errorcode are ABSORBANCE, ARITHMETIC, MEASUREMENT,
and REACTION. For simplicity, the last error set is the one that is forwarded for publication. Therefore, the programmer can establish error precedence. If an arithmetic error is detected by the system (e.g., an attempted
divide by 0), the system will automatically forward an ARITHMETIC error
with no numerical result.
RETURN numerical expression
This statement is used to forward a transformed mAU to the system. The
numerical expression is frequently a register, but may be any numerical
expression (refer to Expressions later in this module). Once a RETURN
statement is encountered in a program, no further statements are executed.
{ statement1; statement2; ...; statement N; }
The statement syntax is a compound statement, used to group several statements. This syntax is most useful when multiple simple statements must be
executed as a group, as within the context of an IF or IF/ELSE statement.
7-26
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
1
{
2
A = RATE(P1,P2,340NM,383NM);
3
B = RATE(P2,P3,340NM,383NM);
4
IF (B < 0.80 * A) {
5
SET ABSORBANCE ERROR;
6
RETURN A;
7
} ELSE {
8
RETURN B;
9
}
10
}
The first statement calculates the rate of reaction between readings P1
and P2, and assigns it to register A. The second statement calculates the rate
between readings P2 and P3, and assigns it to register B. The IF statement
will flag an absorbance error (if the later rate is less than 80% of the earlier
rate) and RETURN the value of the early rate as the transformed mAU
value. Otherwise, no error is set, and the later rate in register B is returned.
Note that the TRUE clause of the IF/ELSE statement contains a compound
statement, which is used to group the SET and RETURN statements into a
single clause.
IF (logical expression) statement ELSE statement
This statement is similar to the IF statement. However, the ELSE statement is
executed when the logical expression is FALSE.
2006/12
7-27
User-Defined Methods
Expressions
Two classes of expressions are possible, depending on the kind of value
produced by the expression. The first class, referred to as numerical expressions, produce numerical results that can be assigned to registers or returned
as values. The other class, called logical expressions, produce logical results
from Boolean operations. Logical expressions are used exclusively within IF
statements. The output of a logical expression cannot be used to assign values
to registers, nor can it be returned.
Numerical Expressions
Numerical expressions allow the user to combine values from function calls,
registers, and constants together using the arithmetic operators *, /, +, and .
The precedence of these operators corresponds to common usage, where *
and / have the same precedence, and are evaluated as encountered in left-toright order; + and have lower precedence than * and /, and are also evaluated in left-to-right order. Operator precedence and evaluation order can be
modified through use of parentheses, which can be nested. The following are
valid expressions:
(a)
A + (B + C) * D
(b)
(A + B) * 0.5
(c)
MAU(P1,340NM) MAU(P1,383NM)
(d)
A/B * RATE(P1,P2,340NM,510NM)
The resulting value from a numerical expression is usually assigned to
a register or returned:
(e)
RETURN A + (B + C) * D;
(f)
C = (A + B) * 0.5;
(g)
Z = MAU(P1,340NM) MAU(P1,383NM);
(h)
RETURN A/B
* RATE(P1,P2,340NM,510NM);
Note that assignment and return statements are always terminated by
a semicolon. Also, expressions may be broken into multiple lines to enhance
readability as in (h) above.
In addition to assignment (=) and being RETURNED, the value of a numerical expression may be used in a comparison operation within a logical
expression (refer to Logical Expressions discussion below).
Logical Expressions
Logical expressions are used within IF statements, which allow a statement
or group of statements to be executed when the logical expression evaluates
to TRUE.
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Several AND and OR operators may appear within a logical expression. The
AND operator has higher precedence than the OR operator. The default
precedence and order of evaluation may be altered using parentheses. For
example:
(a)
A>B
TRUE if register A is greater than register B.
(b)
A > B AND C/D < 0.5
TRUE if register A exceeds register B, and C/D is less than 0.5.
(c)
A > 100.0 OR B < 100.0 AND A/B > 0.50
TRUE if either of the two the conditions listed below tests TRUE:
(1) register A exceeds 100.0 or
(2) register B is less than 100.0 and the ratio of register A to register
B exceeds 0.50.
Note that in example (c) the AND operator has precedence over the OR
operator; the AND operation is tested first, despite the fact that it is the
rightmost operator.
The operators AND and OR are lower in precedence than the arithmetic *, /,
, and + operators. Consequently, there is no need to use parentheses to
surround numerical expressions in comparison operations.
Functions
There are several functions that are useful for extracting data from the raw
photometer data arrays. In all cases, arguments must be supplied to the
function that tells the system which photometric reading(s) and which
wavelength(s) are of interest. Photometric readings are specified as P1, P2,
P3, or P4 and correspond to the readings specified on the User-Defined
Method screen. Wavelengths are specified as 293NM, 340NM, 383NM,
405NM, 452NM, 510NM, 540NM, 577NM, 600NM, or 700NM. In addition, the value ---NM is accepted as a null wavelength specifier, which
indicates that no wavelength is desired.
The available functions are:
MAU(Px, yyyNM)
returns the rate of reaction (mAU/min) between photometric readings Pw and Px for the bichromatic difference of
wavelength yyyNM minus wavelength zzzNM.
7-29
User-Defined Methods
This error may also occur if an expression is found that contains deeply
nested pairs of parentheses [e.g., ((((1 + (2/3) / (3 * (A) + (((0.1))))))))]. If
such an expression exists, simplify it using register assignments!
7-30
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
The second reagent delivery must fall within the interval <60...257.3
seconds>.
In order to easily access the reagent delivery stations, reagent deliveries
should fall within this time interval. Deliveries are excluded between
257.3 and 389.3 seconds, since the cuvette cannot be accessed during this
time. However, there is opportunity for access during the interval 389.3 to
461.3 seconds, which has an undesirable side effect of requiring the
system to index cuvettes until the cuvette enters an accessible zone. The
system will accept a reagent delivery during this interval, although it may
sometimes result in wasted cuvettes.
The sum of all volumes exceeds the maximum cuvette capacity
(500 ul).
The cuvette can only hold 500 L of volume. When this message appears, try scaling all volumes to bring the total volume under 500 L.
WARNING: No error is generated if the total volume is unrealistically low.
350 L of volume is required to fill the optical area of the
cuvette. Therefore, it is particularly important that there be
at least 350 L of volume present in the cuvette before a
photometric read is attempted!
2006/12
7-31
User-Defined Methods
7-32
2006/12
User-Defined Methods
Name: X
Delivery
R1:
S1:
R2:
R3:
Time
-60.0
0.0
Photometry
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
Time
Mode: (
Std Curve: (
1
(
2
) (
hrs
3
) (
4
) (
Mix
)
)
)
)
5
) (
Calibration:
6
) (
hrs
Cartridge Configuration:
Well #
Component
Volume (max 4.0 mL)
# tests/well
Reaction Kinetics:
Reaction Timeline
Event
Time
Volume:
Component 1
Component 2
Component 3
2003/05
7-33
User-Defined Methods
7-34
2003/05
User-Defined Methods
Name: X
Delivery
R1:
S1:
R2:
R3:
Time
-60.0
0.0
Photometry
P1:
P2:
P3:
P4:
Time
Mode: (
Std Curve: (
1
(
2
) (
hrs
3
) (
4
) (
Calibration:
Mix
)
)
)
)
5
) (
6
) (
hrs
Cartridge Configuration:
Well #
Component
Volume (max 4.0 mL)
# tests/well
Reaction Kinetics:
Reaction Timeline
Event
Time
Volume:
Component 1
Component 2
Component 3
2003/05
7-35
User-Defined Methods
7-36
2003/05
Appendix
Appendix
Photometric Calibration (or Verification) Setup Flow Chart ................................. A-3
Photometric Calibration (or Verification) Review Flow Chart ............................... A-4
Help Keys ............................................................................................................... A-5
Operating Conditions Status Area Icons ...............................................................
1 - Service Key ............................................................................................
2 - Reagent Temperature .............................................................................
3 - Cuvette Temperature...............................................................................
4 - UPS (Uninterruptible Power Source) .......................................................
5 - HM Vessel Feeder Empty .......................................................................
Aliquot Wheel (non-HM) .........................................................................
6 - Cuvette Film Cartridge ............................................................................
7 - Reagent Manager ...................................................................................
8 - Printer .....................................................................................................
9 - Short Sample ..........................................................................................
10 - Check Needs ........................................................................................
11 - Alarm Status ..........................................................................................
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-8
A-9
A-9
A-9
A-9
A-14
A-20
A-20
A-21
A-22
2006/12
A-1
Appendix
A-2
2006/12
Appendix
Operating Menu
Press Alt/I
To print this list: press F5: Print and then Exit.
F1: Calibration
Enter: Operator ID
Calibrator (or Verifier) Name/Lot#
Segment Position
Calibrator (or Verifier) Values
F8: QC Yes/No
Yes
Setup more methods?
No
F7: Load/Run
2006/12
A-3
Appendix
Methods
Review precision.
Obvious outliers?
Methods
F7: Calculate
Linear
Review Precision.
Obvious outliers?
Yes
No
No
Yes
F6: See QC
Is QC acceptable?
Yes
No
F7: Un-calculate
F7: Calculate
Evaluate m, b, and r
No
Logit
Review Precision.
Obvious outliers?
Yes
No
Calibrated
Yes
Save printouts
A-4
2006/12
Appendix
Help Keys
The Help keys provide the exact type of help you want. You can obtain help
on:
a specific screen
what tasks you can perform from that screen
what the Function keys on that screen do
some cases, a brief procedure for how to perform the tasks
The various help opportunities are listed below.
2006/12
Press
What Appears
The Quick Index. The Quick Index is a listing of specific tasks and how
to go to the screens where help on performing that task is available. The
Quick Index includes the Function key sequence to get to those screens
from the Operating Menu.
Help (from
any other screen)
Displays information on how to use the screen and the function keys
that are currently on the display.
Shift/Help
Alt/Help
Control/Help
Alt/M
Pressing the Alt and M keys simultaneously displays error messages that
are active. It does not display error messages that have been viewed and
reset.
A-5
Appendix
2
RFG
COLD
3
CVT
COLD
4
+
10
11
CHECK
NEEDS
300
LINE
OFF
240883B-132a
1 - Service Key
Icon
Meaning
The Service key switch is in the Interlock Override position.
The sample and IMT arms will continue to move even if the sample
lid is raised.) Only trained operators should use this key switch
position and then only as directed in this manual (e.g., various
alignment procedures).
WARNING:
2 - Reagent Temperature
Icon
RFG
HOT
RFG
COLD
A-6
Meaning
Refrigerator Hot: The temperature of the Dimension reagent cooling
system is above specified limits.
When the RMS is installed on the Dimension system, the lettering in
the box indicates the specific area that is above specified limits:
RFG = the Dimension system and RMS reagent trays
RFG1 = only the Dimension system reagent tray
RFG2 = only the RMS reagent tray
HYD = only the RMS hydration station
RMS = both the RMS reagent tray and hydration station
Refrigerator Cold: The temperature of the Dimension reagent
cooling system (and, if the RMS is in use, the RMS reagent tray, or
RMS hydration station) is below specified limits.
2006/12
Appendix
3 - Cuvette Temperature
Icon
Meaning
CVT
HOT
CVT
COLD
HM Hot: The HM heating system temperature is above the acceptable range for processing. The HM will stop processing and no
results for the current test will be calculated.
HM
HOT
HM
COLD
2006/12
Meaning
A red ON inside this icon Indicates that power to the instrument has
just been interrupted and the UPS is in use. An intermittent alarm will
also be sounding. This will change to the word LOW when the
instrument is preparing to shut down before the UPS loses all power.
The UPS will be recharged whenever normal electric power is
restored. If LOW appears continuously while the instrument is
connected to its wall outlet, call the Technical Assistance Center.
A-7
Appendix
Meaning
The HM reaction vessel sensor, located near the top of the reaction
vessel feeder chute, is not detecting a reaction vessel. Add reaction
vessels to the reaction vessel holder or check for a reaction vessel
jam in the vessel transfer system.
Meaning
This is the number of aliquot wheel positions remaining. Replacement of the aliquot wheel will be required shortly.
19
Meaning
This is the number of cuvettes remaining in the cuvette film cartridge.
Replacement of the cuvette film cartridge will be required shortly.
300
7 - Reagent Manager
Icon
Meaning
The system has a problem with adding, removing (or, if the RMS is
in use, transferring) reagent cartridges, or a reagent cartridge has
been added to the reagent tray which would force calibration of a
third lot. Press the Alt/R key combination to see why this icon is
blinking and to remove the icon from the screen.
Additional Reagent Manager icon information:
A number appearing with the icon indicates the total number of
empty slots remaining in the Dimension system reagent tray (and, if
in use, in the RMS reagent tray).
If the word FULL appears in black with the icon, the reagent tray
(and, if in use, in the RMS reagent tray) is full. If it appears in red, the
instrument has a system need for a new reagent cartridge to process
tests but there is no room on the reagent tray; you must remove a
reagent cartridge before one can be inserted.
A-8
2006/12
Appendix
8 - Printer
Icon
LINE
Meaning
This icon appears with one of four possible words:
OFF the printer power switch is off.
OUT the printer is out of paper.
LINE the printer is off-line. Press the Select button on the
printer to put the printer back on-line.
ERR there is a communications problem between the PC
and the printer.
9 - Short Sample
Icon
Meaning
One or more sample containers in the current Load List does not
have enough sample volume to run all its requested tests. Hold
down the Alt key and press L to view a list of these short samples.
See Resolving a Short Sample Detected procedure in Module
2: Using.
10 - Check Needs
Icon
NEEDS
CHECK
CHECK
NEEDS
Meaning
The yellow Needs Check icon appears when the system is checking
itself for any needs to process the Load List.
If the red Check Needs icon appears, the system has found needs
that require operator attention before samples can be processed.
Hold down the Alt key and press N to go to the System Needs
screen and see which needs are required. To fill these system
needs, see Responding to System Needs in Module 2: Using.
11 - Alarm Status
Icon
Meaning
The alarm is sounding. A message will appear in the error message
area indicating the reason for the alarm.
The alarm has been turned off by the operator. If an error condition
occurs, the alarm will not sound; however, a message indicating the
reason for the alarm will appear in the error message area.
OFF
2006/12
A-9
Appendix
Keystroke Combinations
To use a keystroke combination, hold down the first key and press the second
key.
A-10
Key Combination
Function
Control/Stop
Stops all operations in progress in a manner that will not damage the
instrument. All tests in progress will be aborted. However, all scheduled
tests will be retained in instrument memory. To resume operations, press
the Reset key.
Shift/Delete
When entering information in a field, hold down the Shift key and press
Delete to delete all characters to the right of the cursor in a field.
Shift/Exit
Moves you from the current screen directly to the Operating Menu.
Shift/
When entering information in a field, hold down the Shift key and press
the right or left arrow key to move the cursor one space to the left or
right. This will not delete any information in the field.
Alt/I
Alt/L
Takes you directly to the Load List Short Samples screen. To display
the All and New Samples views, press F2: Next Status.
Alt/M
Alt/N
Alt/O
Alt/P
Prints out the entire screen appearing on the display. You cannot move
to any other screen until this printing is complete. This will not affect
instrument processing.
Alt/R
Alt/S
Takes you directly to the Segment Status screen from which you can
view the status of either the segment positions currently loaded on the
instrument (On Board Segments view) or all segments (All Segments
view).
2006/12
Appendix
2006/12
Key Combination
Function
Alt/Z
Alt/A
Alt/D
Alt/B
QC Alert Key
Alt/C
A-11
Appendix
Operating Passwords
Operating Passwords are passwords that let operators customize the instrument operation to their work.
To start or stop using a password: go to the System Configuration Menu
screen, press F7: Password, and type in the password exactly as it appears
below.
A-12
Password
What it Does
SHOWCL
A chloride test will automatically be requested whenever the Na/K test key
is pressed. This does not require additional sample.
ignoredup
The software will not process samples on the instrument that have the
same bar code ID. However, there may be special situations where you
must run a load list with samples that have the same bar code ID. You
can do this using a special password ignoredup (short for ignore
duplicates). Any samples that have the same bar code ID will now be
run.
DATA
Turns on Method Diagnostic Data and allows the operator to print out filter
data for test result troubleshooting with the Technical Assistance Center.
(See Module 5: Troubleshooting)
2006/12
Appendix
A test result line on the test report can display only one test report message. If
more than one test report message has affected the result, the instrument
prints the highest priority message. See Test Report Message Priorities
later in this Appendix.
2006/12
A-13
Appendix
What to Do:
This result cannot be reported. Rerun the sample. If the same message appears:
1 Run a QC sample for that method.
If the error does not reoccur for this QC sample, call the Technical Assistance Center.
If the message reoccurs, remove and confirm the removal of the Flex
reagent cartridge for the method. Then add that same Flex reagent cartridge
back into the instrument. If the instrument will not accept it, obtain and add a
new Flex reagent cartridge.
2 Rerun the sample. If the message reoccurs, call the Technical Assistance Center.
What to Do:
For HM methods:
Absorbance readings are taken to ensure that the reaction is completely transferred
from the HM module to the cuvette and that there is no system contamination of
reagents.
For non-HM methods:
This result cannot be reported. Align the sample and reagent probes, and then rerun
the sample.
For HM methods:
This result cannot be reported. If the sample is fibrinated, centrifuge the sample and
rerun. If the sample is not fibrinated or the error persists, call the Technical Assistance Center.
Aborted Test
Explanation: An action by either the operator or instrument aborted this test.
What to Do:
Absorbance
Explanation: The result is above the method assay range and cannot be calculated.
What to Do:
A-14
Check the method Insert Sheet to determine if the sample can be diluted. If yes,
manually dilute the sample (see Insert Sheet for recommended diluent) and rerun the
test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result down into the assay range.
Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample Data screen and the
instrument will multiply the result by this factor for you. (See the Dilution of a
Sample example later in this section.)
2006/12
Appendix
What to Do:
Check the method Insert Sheet to determine if the sample can be diluted. If yes,
manually dilute the sample (see Insert Sheet for recommended diluent) and rerun the
test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result down into the assay range.
Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample Data screen and the
instrument will multiply the result by this factor for you. (See the Dilution of a
Sample example later in this section.)
What to Do:
Check the method Insert Sheet to determine if the sample can be diluted. If yes,
manually dilute the sample (see Insert Sheet for recommended diluent) and rerun the
test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result down into the assay range.
Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample Data screen and the
instrument will multiply the result by this factor for you. (See the Dilution of a
Sample example later in this section.)
Arithmetic
Explanation: This error is associated with nonlinear (logit) methods only. This error occurred in
result calculations because the change In absorbance was less than the C0 or greater
than C0 + C1.
What to Do:
If on a patient sample, the concentration is either very high or very low. Rerun the
sample or call the Technical Assistance Center. If QC has also shifted low, change
the R2 reagent pump 2500 L syringe, cancel the well in use and prepare new reagent.
Assay Range
Explanation: The result is above or below the method assay range listed in Method Parameters on
the instrument. Can be either low or high.
What to Do:
2006/12
If the result is LOW, analyte values may be depressed below the assay range because
the patient sample has very little or no concentration of the analyte, insufficient
sample, is falsely depressed because of interfering substances, or there was an instrument system failure. Each laboratory should establish its own protocol for addressing
the "Below Assay" test report message before reporting the result as less than the
established clinical reportable range. The procedure should check:
the sample container has sufficient usable sample for the tests ordered
the sample container was placed in the appropriate segement and cup position
verify instrument function
If no obvious reason for the low analyte result is found, or the result is inconsistent
with the available clinical information and prior tests, you can confirm the accuracy
of the result with additional testing such as:
If the result is a negative number, perform a 50% recovery of a known standard
or QC material to confirm that there was no activity in the sample, that there was
enough sample volume used by the instrument, and that there was no system
malfunction. (See "50% Recovery of a Standard Using a Sample" later in this
section.)
A-15
Appendix
If the result is HIGH, check the method Insert Sheet to determine if the sample can
be diluted. If yes, manually dilute the sample (see Insert Sheet for recommended
diluent) and rerun the test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result
down into the assay range. Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter
Sample Data screen and the instrument will multiply the result by this factor for
you. (See the Dilution of a Sample example later in this section.)
Assay range diluted (assy rng/dilu)
Explanation: Test result exceeded the assay range, The sample was then autodiluted and rerun. The
result of the rerun still exceeded the assay range.
What to Do:
Check the method Insert Sheet to determine if the sample can be diluted. If yes,
manually dilute the sample (see Insert Sheet for recommended diluent) and rerun the
test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result down into the assay range.
Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample Data screen and the
instrument will multiply the result by this factor for you. (See the Dilution of a
Sample example later in this section.)
What to Do:
Analyte values may be depressed below the assay range because the patient sample
has very little or no concentration of the analyte, insufficient sample, is falsely
depressed because of interfering substances, or there was an instrument system
failure. Each laboratory should establish its own protocol for addressing the "Below
Assay" test report message before reporting the result as less than the established
clinical reportable range. The procedure should check:
the sample container has sufficient usable sample for the tests ordered
the sample container was placed in the appropriate segement and cup position
verify instrument function
If no obvious reason for the low analyte result is found, or the result is inconsistent
with the available clinical information and prior tests, you can confirm the accuracy
of the result with additional testing such as:
Perform a 50% recovery of a known standard or QC material to confirm that
there was no activity in the sample, that there was enough sample volume used
by the instrument, and that there was no system malfunction. (See "50% Recovery of a Standard Using a Sample" later in this section.)
What to Do:
A-16
2006/12
Appendix
Diluted
Explanation: The test has been autodiluted.
What to Do: If test result is printed, the result (which exceeds the assay range) may be reported.
If no test result is printed, the result did not exceed the assay range. Do the following:
Ensure that sufficient sample volume was available in the sample container.
Verify the sample quality (fibrin, air bubbles, etc.).
Rerun the test.
Explanation: For HA1C, a dilution factor has been inappropriately downloaded from your LIS.
What to Do: No test result is printed. Process diluted whole blood sample without entering a
dilution factor.
Explanation: For HIL, a dilution factor has been entered for the sample.
What to Do: No HIL index is printed. The HIL feature applies to undiluted samples only.
Hemoglobin (TBI and DBI)
Explanation: When this message appears with the DBI result, it indicates a hemoglobin
concentration greater than 50 mg/dL and will lower the DBI result for that sample.
What to Do: Follow your laboratorys procedures for reporting results when the sample is
hemolyzed.
Explanation: When this message appears with the TBI result, it indicates a hemoglobin
concentration greater than 1000 mg/dL and will lower the TBI result for that sample.
What to Do: Follow your laboratorys procedures for reporting results when the sample is
hemolyzed.
Hemoglobin (TBIL and DBIL)
Explanation: When this message appears with the TBIL result, it indicates a hemoglobin
concentration greater than 100 mg/dL and will lower the DBIL result for that sample.
When TBIL and DBIL tests are ordered together, the hemoglobin message appears
next to the TBIL and DBIL results.
When TBIL and DBIL tests are ordered separately, the hemoglobin message appears
next to the TBIL result only.
If a TBIL and a DBIL are ordered together and the TBIL result contains a
nonreportable test report message or error condition, the DBIL test will be aborted.
What to Do: If only a TBIL was ordered, report the TBIL result.
If both TBIL and DBIL were ordered, together or separately, report the TBIL result.
Follow your laboratorys procedures for reporting DBIL results when the sample is
hemolyzed.
WARNING: Do not report a DBIL result while the TBIL for the sample is still running
because the hemoglobin error can appear only after the TBIL result is
complete.
WARNING: Do not run a DBIL without running a TBIL because hemoglobin
interference will not be checked and can falsely depress the DBIL result.
2007/10
A-17
Appendix
HI
What to Do: Urine drugs of abuse methods should be centrifuged and rerun. For other methods,
manually dilute the sample (refer to the methods Insert Sheet for the recommended
diluent) and rerun the test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result down
into the assay range. Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample
Data screen and the instrument will multiply the result by this factor for you.
For UCFP:
During calibration of the UCFP method, the high A error may be observed on the
level 5 calibration. This error for UCFP does not affect the proper method calibration
and may be disregarded. Successful calibration can be verified using quality control
materials. (See Dilution of a Sample later in this ection.)
Explanation: Autodilution was not performed.
What to Do: If your system is set up to perform automatic dilutions, refer to Automatic Dilutions
in the Customizing section for possible reasons why autodilution was not performed.
HIL interf
Explanation: One or more of the HIL indexes for the method is equal to or greater than the HIL
Alert Index entered during HIL Setup.
What to Do: Follow your laboratorys procedures for reporting results when the sample is
hemolyzed, icteric, and/or lipemic.
hp
What to Do: Urine drugs of abuse methods should be centrifuged and rerun. For other methods,
manually dilute the sample (refer to the methods Insert Sheet for the recommended
diluent) and rerun the test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result down
into the assay range. Enter the dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample
Data screen and the instrument will multiply the result by this factor for you.
Automatic dilution is not performed for this error since it can be caused by extreme
substrate depletion or other conditions which may require method troubleshooting.
(See the Dilution of a Sample example later in this section.)
A-18
2007/10
Appendix
lp
What to Do: Load a new reagent cartridge into the instrument. If you had previously loaded a
reagent cartridge but did not obtain any results, check for and troubleshoot any
reagent preparation errors listed on the Error Log screen.
Not Calibrated (no calib'n)
Explanation: The method lot used for this test was never calibrated.
What to Do: If this error message appears in the message field on the screen, press Alt/M and
follow the steps that appear. If it does not appear in the message field, go to the Error
Log screen. Move the cursor to the error, press F5: More Info, and follow the steps to
resolve it. To get to the Error Log screen from the Operating Menu, press F5: Process
Ctrl, then F6: Error Log.
Substrate Depletion (subst dplet'n)
Explanation: The kinetic check on the reaction exceeded the limits set in the system software for
that method.
What to Do: Manually dilute the sample (see the methods Insert Sheet for the recommended
diluent) and rerun the test. Make the smallest dilution possible to bring the result
down into the assay range. A minimum dilution of 1:10 is recommended. Enter the
dilution factor as a whole number on the Enter Sample Data screen. (See the Dilution of a Sample example at the end of these messages.)
Temperature
Explanation: The cuvette temperature is out of range.
2006/12
A-19
Appendix
Dilution Examples
This section contains three examples of dilutions and how they are used to
resolve samples with test report messages.
Dilution of a Sample
When a test result exceeds the assay range for a method, the Dimension
RxL Max clinical chemistry system will automatically dilute the sample
(based on the AutoDilute Vols field on the Method Parameters screen) and
rerun the test.
If the test result still exceeds the assay range the printed test report will
contain the message assy rng/dilu indicating that the instrument diluted the
sample and the result is still above the assay range for the method.
You will now need to make a manual dilution of the sample and rerun it. If
the sample can be diluted, make the smallest dilution possible to bring the
result down into the assay range. Make a dilution slightly greater than what
was done by the instrument.
Example:
The assy rng/dilu test report message was printed next to the GLU method
on the printed test report. According to the volume programmed in the
Method Parameters screen for the GLU method, the instrument made a 1:1.5
dilution. According to the Method Insert Sheet, water can be used to dilute
the sample.
To make a 1:5 dilution of 100 L of sample, you would add 400 L of water
to the 100 L of sample.
Volume of Sample * Dilution Factor = Total Dilution Volume
100 L
*
5
= 500 L
Total Dilution Volume Volume of Sample = Volume of Diluent.
500 L
100 L
= 400 L
To run this diluted sample, enter the number 5 in the Dilution field on the
Enter Sample Data screen and the instrument will multiply the result by this
factor for you.
A-20
2006/12
Appendix
Since this calculated result matches the original sample result of 0.5 g/dL you
may report a result of less than 2.0 g/dL for the original sample.
2006/12
A-21
Appendix
Example:
The assay range test report message was printed next to an ALC result of -1
on the printed test report. Before reporting no activity or 0, a 50% recovery
of a known standard must be performed.
Prepare a 1:2 dilution of a known standard using the formulas below. If the
ALC test result for this mixture matches the concentration of ALC in the
known standard, then a 0 may be reported for the original sample.
To make a 1:2 dilution of a 300-L sample, you would add 300 L of known
standard to the 300 L of sample.
Volume of Sample * Dilution Factor = Total Dilution Volume
300 L
*
2
= 600 L
Total Dilution Volume Volume of Sample = Volume of Known Standard.
600 L
300 L
= 300 L
To run this mixture, enter the number 2 in the Dilution field on the Enter
Sample Data screen and the instrument will multiply the result by this factor
for you.
A-22
2006/12
Appendix
2006/12
A-23
Appendix
Humidity
Altitude
Mains supply
Overvoltage Category
Pollution Degree
Emission Compliance
The Dimension RxL Max system has been designed and tested to EN55022
Class A. In a domestic environment it may cause radio interference, in which
case, you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
The Dimension RxL Max system should not be used next to any Industrial
Scientific and Medical (ISM) equipment that must functionally produce RF
energy (e. g., diathermy equipment).
Barcode Scanner
The barcode scanner uses Class I LEDs (light-emitting diodes), and is not
hazardous to your eyes.
WARNING: The Dimension RxL Max system should not be used next to
any Industrial Scientific and Medical (ISM) equipment that must
functionally produce RF energy (e. g., Diathermy Equipment).
A-24
2006/12
Appendix
Plumbing Diagrams
Wash Station
#1
1 COM
1 NO
J45D
#2
2 COM
2 NO
J45B
WASHPROBE
HOME SENSOR
PRESSURE
SWITCH
ASSEMBLY
WASH
ASPIRATE
#2
WASH
ASPIRATE
#1
WASH
PROBE
MOTOR
2006/12
J45C
J45A
WASH
PROBE
#1
TO
VACUUM
WASTE
WASH
PROBE
#2
CABLE
CLAMP
A-25
Appendix
Pump Panel
To Photo Sampler
To Sample Drain
R1
SAMPLE PUMP
N
C
1
0
0
l
P14CDF
J14C
P14CDF
J14F
R2 PUMP
P14CDF
R2J14D
N
C C
NO
R2
2
5
0
0
l
5
0
0
l
2
5
0
0
l
NO
C N
C
NO
R1 PUMP
To Monopump Port 2
P14CDF
R1J14D
N C
C
From Water
Bottle
A-26
5
0
0
l
NO
2
5
0
0
l
2006/12
Appendix
Pumps
To Photometric Sampler
Sample
Pump
(Conduit)
R2 Drain
Wash Probe 1
Wash Probe 2
Sample Drain (ProbeCleaner)
Sample Drain (Water)
R2 Pump
J14C
J14F
R2J14D
R1
1
0
0
l
N
CC
NO
2
5
0
0
l
5
0
0
l
N
C C
NO
N
C C
NO
2
5
0
0
l
R2
To Reagent Probe
Cleaner Bottle
To
Sample Probe
J84
#2
NC
C
NO
Sample
Cleaner
Pump
J49B
Probe
Cleaner
Pump
2
5
0
0
l
P81
R1J14D
5
0
0
l
#1
CN
C
NO
N
C C
NO
2
5
0
0
l
To Wash
Buffer Bottle
To
MonoPump
Port 2
From
Water Bottle
J49A
Wash Pump
2006/12
R1 Pump
A-27
Appendix
A-28
2006/12
Index
Index
A
A tubing 3-92
"Abnormal Assay" (abnl assay) 6-78
ABS method, selecting 6-32
accessory spare parts kit 3-15, 3-30
action keys 1-18
adapters
and SSC 2-7
pediatric tubes 2-6
sample tubes 2-5
adding samples while processing 2-19
air filters, replacing 3-22
Alarm Off key 1-19
alarm status icon A-9
Alert keys 6-55
QC 6-66
reagent cartridge alert 6-57
STAT Status 6-55
Supplies 6-57
alert keys
calibration 6-58
QC 6-58
Alignment File screen 4-3
alignment gauges
aliquot wheel 4-16
IMT drain and port 4-16
reagent probe 4-23
reagent tray 4-23
sample probe 4-34
segment 4-16
alignment offsets 4-3
alignments
bar code scanner 4-4
cuvette ring 4-6
general information 4-3
HM components 4-8
HM incubate wheel to transfer opening 4-9
HM vessel transfer shuttle to incubate wheel 4-12
HM vessel transfer shuttle to load 4-14
HM vessel transfer shuttle to wash wheel 4-13
HM wash probes to wash wheel 4-11
HM wash wheel to incubate wheel 4-10
IMT probe 4-16
IMT pump 4-21
photometer 4-22
R1 reagent probe 4-23
R2 reagent probe 4-27
reagent tray 4-32
sample probe 4-34
2006/12
aliquot wheel
alignment with sample probe 4-41
home sensor, replacing 3-52
icon A-8
lid open sensor, replacing 3-54
replacing 3-51
"All" sample status 2-31
Allen corrections 7-24
Alt key 1-20, A-5, A-10
amperage, fuses 3-63
applications area 1-25
arrow keys 1-19
Assign Method Keys screen 6-94
asterisks, meaning of 2-30, 5-8, 5-17
attention safety label 1-8
"Autoalign failed to sense Standard A . . ." 5-24
automatic cartridge removal option 6-6
automatic dilution option
overview 6-6, 6-35
sample volumes
for serum/plasma samples 6-37
for urine samples 6-36
warning 2-4
automatic HM vessel load option 6-6
automatic panic rerun option
activating 6-10
field description 6-6
report slips 6-11
warning about sample volume 2-4
automatic reflex testing option
deactivating 6-9
field description 6-6
overview 6-8
report slips 6-11
setting up a test 6-9
warning about sample volume 2-4
automatic rerun option 2-4, 6-6
autorerun. See automatic rerun option
B
B tubing 3-92
backspace key 1-20
backward slash (\) key 1-20
bar code labels
and short sample problem 2-27
and SSC processing 2-7
on reagent cartridges 2-50
on sample tubes 2-9
bar code scanner, alignment 4-4
batch samples 2-14
I-1
Index
C
C0 and C1 terms 2-81
calculated results
equations 6-13
using 6-12
Calculated Results Setup screen 6-12
calibration
acceptable method results 2-71
accepting results 2-70
alert 2-66
cancelling 2-72
expiration 2-83
group 2-67
history 2-73
IMT 2-81
mixer 3-70
outliers 2-71
photometer lamp 3-145
printing results 2-71
review flow chart A-4
reviewing results 2-70
setting up 2-69, 2-76
setup flow chart A-3
status lists 2-82
troubleshooting 2-74
user-defined methods 7-18
calibration alert
configuring 6-58
"Cannot Find Home" error 5-28
Cant Process status message 1-22
card cage
control board reseating 3-136
fuses 3-63
cautions, meaning of 1-8
check needs icon A-9
"Check Reaction Vessel Waste - Reset Counter" erro
3-11
check specifications, system 3-9
checking for other maintenance 3-8
chemistry troubleshooting
imprecision 5-7
inaccuracy 5-6
I-2
overview 5-5
QC results 5-6
chemistry wash, replacing 2-53
Cl sensor status 1-23
cleaning
cuvette windows 3-39
general instructions 3-5
HM wash probes 3-13
IMT waste tubing 3-44, 3-45
optical filters 3-103
R2 reagent probes 3-13
sample area 3-7
sample probe and drain 3-46
water diluent bottle 3-48
coefficient of variation, formula for 2-40
coefficients, electrolyte 2-81
College of American Pathologists xv
color-coding, tubing 3-80
"Communication Error" error 5-34
components, overview 1-5
conditioning IMT system 3-93, 5-18
configuring system to process downloaded samples 221
containers, types. See also sample cups; sample
tubes; SSC
control board reseating 3-136
Control key A-5, A-10
control products, new 6-65
controlled power shutdown 1-12
correlation
calculations 6-18, 6-22
deleting discrepant results 6-21
minimum number of samples 6-18, 6-20
overview 6-18
split sample study 6-18
counter for HM consumables 3-11
"Critical Time Missed" error 5-33
crossover quality control 6-40, 6-71
cups. See sample cups
cursor movement keys 1-19
cursor, moving 1-19
cuvette
automatic removal 6-95
cuvette diaphragm, replacing 3-55
cuvette film cartridge icon A-8
cuvette film cartridge, replacing 3-58
cuvette ring
alignment 4-6
sensor, replacing 3-60
cuvette system temperature, calibrating 3-33
cuvette temperature icon A-7
cuvette waste, emptying 3-7
cuvette windows, cleaning 3-39
2006/12
D
D1 tubing 3-83
D2 tubing 3-83
data, sample 2-11
DAU. See drugs of abuse methods
dead volume
SSC 2-7
Delete key 1-19
deleting segments 2-34
Diagnostics status 1-22
diaphragm, cuvette, replacing 3-55
dilchk. See dilution check
diluent bottle, water 3-155
diluent, replacing fluid 2-58
dilution
automatic 2-4, 6-35
examples A-20
dilution check
resolving a failed
bias greater than 1% 2-62
did not process completely 2-64
Na or K SD unacceptable 2-63
running 2-60
values 2-61
"Done" sample status 2-31
drugs of abuse methods
quality control 6-71
E
editing samples 2-45
electrical specifications 1-28
electrolyte coefficients 2-81
electrostatic discharge hazard, safety label 1-9
emergency shutdown 1-11
Enter key 1-19, 1-20
enter sample data mode option 6-6
"Entered" sample status 2-31
entering sample data 2-11
equations, calculated results 6-13
errors
area on screen 1-24
"Autoalign failed to sense Standard A. . ." 5-24
"Block Time Missed" 5-33
"Board Test Failed" 5-34
"Cannot Find Home" 5-28
"Check Reaction Vessel Waste - Reset Counter" 311
"Communication Error" 5-34
"Critical Time Missed" 5-33
"Illegal Error" 5-33
"IMT A to D Drifting" 5-20
"IMT Calibration Not Valid" 5-20
"IMT Failed to Detect Flush Fluid" 5-21
2006/12
Index
F
F1 and F2 tubing. See IMT: miscellaneous tubing
F1 tubing 3-83
F2 tubing 3-83
fill guide, sample tube 2-10
filter data, printing 5-7
Flex loader home sensor, replacing 3-61
Flex presence sensor, replacing 3-62
fluids, replacing HM 2-53
flush fluid, priming with 5-19
flush, replacing fluid bags 2-58
formulas
standard deviation and coefficient of variation 2-40
front faceplate, removing 3-61
function keys
area on screen 1-25
description 1-18
for Method Review screen 6-47
fuses, replacing 3-63
G
groove, positioning, on HM wash probe 3-78
grounding wrist strap 3-136
guard, wash station 3-28
H
heat torch assembly, replacing 3-64
help
keys 1-19, A-5
software error troubleshooting 5-15
Technical Assistance Center xvii
I-3
Index
HIL
alert index values 6-52
and test report 2-40
feature 6-51
index 2-38, 2-41
interf message A-23
interference table 2-39, 6-51
operating modes 6-53
setup 6-52
test result 2-41
histogram plots 6-42
HM fluids, replacing 2-53
HM incubate wheel
aligning to transfer opening 4-9
aligning to vessel transfer shuttle 4-12
aligning to wash wheel 4-10
alignment with R2 reagent arm 4-31
alignment with sample probe 4-38
positions 2-36
status codes 2-36
HM incubate wheel home sensor, replacing 3-66
HM mixer assembly PC board, replacing 3-68
HM module
calibration temperature 3-38
priming the components 3-27
replacing fluids 2-53
HM module configured option 6-6
HM pump head, replacing 3-25
HM reaction vessel
adding 2-56
status 2-36
HM reagent probe cleaner 2-53
HM shuttle home sensor, replacing 3-75
HM vessel detect switch, replacing 3-76
HM vessel feeder empty icon A-8
HM vessel transfer shuttle
aligning to incubate wheel 4-12
aligning to load 4-14
aligning to wash wheel 4-13
HM wash probe home sensor, replacing 3-79
HM wash probes
aligning to wash wheel 4-11
cleaning 3-13
replacing 3-77
styletting 3-28
tubing replacement 3-80
HM wash station pump head, replacing 3-25
HM wash wheel
aligning to incubate wheel 4-10
aligning to vessel transfer shuttle 4-13
aligning to wash probes 4-11
replacing 3-82
HM wash wheel home sensor, replacing 3-66
host interface requirements 1-30
I-4
I
icons, operating conditions
alarm status A-9
aliquot wheel A-8
check needs A-9
cuvette film cartridge A-8
cuvette temperature A-7
HM vessel feeder empty A-8
needs check A-9
overview 1-23
printer A-9
reagent manager 2-51, A-8
reagent temperature A-6
service key A-6
short sample 2-26, A-9
uninterruptible power source A-7
"Illegal Error" error 5-33
imprecision, troubleshooting 5-7
IMT
bleaching the system 3-20
calibrating 2-81
calibration slope ranges 2-61
conditioning 3-93, 5-18
configuring
EC02 with lytes 6-30
soak interval 6-31
consumables 2-57
diagram of tubing 5-25
dilution check values 2-61
electrolyte coefficients, C0 and C1 2-81
miscellaneous tubing
replacing 3-83
probe alignment
overview 4-16
probe to aliquot wheel 4-20
probe to drain 4-18
probe to IMT port 4-18
probe to IMT probe cleaner bottle 4-19
probe to segment 4-19
probe replacing 3-86
probe tubing, replacing 3-87
pump alignment 4-21
pump tubing
diagram 3-16
replacing 3-16
results troubleshooting 5-16
rotary valve seal
lubricating 3-89
replacing 3-88
rotary valve sensor, replacing 3-90
rotary valve tubing, replacing 3-92
sampler handler sensors, replacing 3-94
sampler troubleshooting 5-13
sensors, overriding 2-81
2006/12
K
K sensor status 1-23
k values 6-13
keyboard keys 1-20
keypad keys 1-19
keys
action 1-18
arrows 1-26
calib alert 1-26
creating panel 6-59
cursor movement 1-19
exit 1-26
function 1-18
help 1-26
home 1-26
keyboard 1-20
2006/12
Index
keypad 1-19
productivity 1-26
qc alert 1-26
run 1-26
sample alert 1-26
STAT status 1-26
supplies 1-26
test 1-17, 6-94
keystroke combinations A-10
knurled fittings 3-133
L
labels
reagent cartridge 2-50
safety 1-8
Levey-Jennings plots
patient 6-43
quality control 6-44
limited cup 2-29
linear methods 2-71
LIS
automatic panic rerun 6-10
communications configurations 6-7
receiving calculated results 6-12, 6-51
running samples downloaded from 2-21
test results 6-11
translate method names 6-84
load, aligning to vessel transfer shuttle 4-14
load errors 2-46
loading samples 2-16
logit methods 2-71
"Lost Steps" error 5-30
lot numbers, reagent cartridges 7-17
lubricating
IMT rotary valve seal 3-89
monopump piston lip seal 3-100
monopump valve seal 3-18
pump lead screw 3-49
M
maintenance
checking for 3-8
daily 3-7
recording 3-9
maintenance log 3-9
manual
organization xvi
sidebars xvii
manual reviews documentation xv
means
actual 6-44, 6-46, 6-49
expected 6-44, 6-46, 6-49
troubleshooting 5-12
I-5
Index
unacceptable
HM wash system 5-12
IMT sampler 5-13
reagent arms 5-10
sampler 5-11
message area 1-25
method correlation 6-18
method kinetics, user-defined methods
reviewing 7-20
using 7-22
method parameters, entering 6-32, 7-15
Method Parameters screen 6-9, 6-32
fields 6-33
user-defined methods 7-15
method results (patient and QC)
deleting 6-47
histogram plots 6-42
Levey-Jennings plots 6-43
list 6-41
printing 6-41
reviewing 6-40
undeleting 6-47
Method Review screen
fields 6-45
function keys 6-47
overview 6-40
mixer calibration 3-70
mixing samples with known standard A-21
monopump
piston home sensor
adjusting 3-97
replacing 3-95
piston lip seal
lubricating 3-100
replacing 3-98
position sensor, replacing 3-101
valve seal
lubricating 3-18
replacing 3-17
motor control boards 3-114, 3-120
Moving Wheel ... status message 1-22
muffler filter, vacuum pump 3-152
N
Na sensor status 1-23
needs check icon A-9
number keys 1-19
I-6
O
offboard reagent lots, managing 3-12
offsets, alignment 4-3
operating conditions status 1-23
area on screen A-6
icons 1-23, A-6
operating passwords A-12
optical filters
cleaning and replacing 3-103
wavelengths used for methods 3-105
outliers 2-71
overriding IMT sensors 2-81
P
panel keys, creating 6-59
panic rerun. See automatic panic rerun option
paper, replacing on printer 3-109
password
operating A-12
patient results
histogram plots 6-42
Levey-Jennings plots 6-43
printing 6-41
reviewing 6-40
Pause key 1-18
PED. See pediatric sample tubes
pediatric sample tubes
adaptors 2-6
designating pediatric segments 6-81, 6-82
sample probe depth alignment 4-40
using 2-6
PgDn key 1-19
PgUp key 1-19
phone line requirements
DBNET installations 1-30
Dimension RxL Max system 1-30
photometer
alignment 4-22
filter wheel dual sensor, replacing 3-106
home sensor, replacing 3-108
lamp calibration 3-145
system check specifications 3-9
troubleshooting 5-9
photometry reading times, for user-defined methods 78
pinch hazard
safety label 1-8
plasma samples, autodilute volume 6-37
positioning groove, HM wash probe 3-78
power requirements 1-28
pressure switch, replacing 3-153
primary tube. See sample tubes
2006/12
priming
pumps 3-27
with flush fluid 5-19
with salt bridge solution 5-19
with standard A 5-18
"Printed" sample status 2-31
printer
configuring 6-7, 6-60
external, customizing report 6-61
icon A-9
replacing paper 3-109
printout. See test results
priority panels 6-83
probe. See HM wash probes; IMT: probe; reagent
probes; sample probe
probe cleaner pump head, replacing 3-26
probe cleaning solutions, replacing 2-53
probe positioning groves 3-78
probe tip, replacing 3-126
Processing status 1-22
programming. See user-defined methods: programming
protective earth terminal, safety label 1-9
pump alignment, IMT 4-21
pump lead screw, lubricating 3-49
pump limit switches, replacing 3-110
pump, mono. See monopump
pump muffler filter, vacuum 3-152
pump priming 3-27
pump solenoid valve, replacing 3-115
pump syringe, replacing 3-117
puncture hazard
safety label 1-8
Q
QC alert
configuring 6-58
QC Data
store 6-89
qcdat.xls 6-88, 6-89
quality control
alerts
group 6-70
key 6-66
checking status 6-73
crossover 6-40, 6-71
daily 6-65
drugs of abuse methods 6-71
entering ranges 6-72
histogram plots 6-42
Levey-Jennings plots 6-44
new control/reagent lots 6-65
overview 6-64
panel
2006/12
Index
define 6-74
edit 6-76
printing results 6-41
printout 6-72
product
define 6-68
edit 6-69
reviewing results 6-40, 6-50, 6-71
serum fluids 6-71
setting expiration periods 6-73
troubleshooting 2-75, 5-6
user-defined methods 7-18
QuikLYTE integrated multisensor, replacing 2-59
R
R1 tubing 3-83
"Ready" sample status 2-31
reagent arms
system check specifications 3-9
system check troubleshooting 5-10
reagent cartridge
alert threshold 2-47
reagent cartridges
adding
automatically 2-49
manually 2-50
bar code labels 2-50
configuration, user-defined methods 7-9
deleting offboard lots 3-12
filling for user-defined methods 7-16
inventory 2-48
label 2-50
loading for user-defined methods 7-17
lot numbers 7-17
low volume 6-84
performing hydrations 6-25
removing 2-51
third lot of 2-52
reagent hydrations
by panel 6-27
by preprogrammed time 6-28, 6-31
by specific cartridge lot 6-26
by specific test 6-27
cancelling 6-26
Inventory/Hydration screen 6-27
overview 6-25
preprogrammed setup list 6-27, 6-29
reagent lid
opening 3-5
reagent lots, managing offboard 3-12
reagent manager icon 2-51, A-8
"Reagent Preparation Error" error 5-32
I-7
Index
reagent probes
cleaning R2 3-13
R1 alignments
arm to drain 4-24
arm to reagent tray 4-26
arm to target (cuvette) 4-25
overview 4-23
R2 alignments
arm to drain 4-28
arm to HM incubate wheel 4-31
arm to reagent tray 4-30
arm to target (cuvette) 4-29
overview 4-27
tip replacement 3-126
reagent system temperature, calibrating 3-36
reagent temperature icon A-6
reagent tray
alignment 4-32
home sensor, replacing 3-129
reagent tubing, replacing 3-131
reduced sample volume 6-39
reference range indicators 2-38, A-13
reflex testing, automatic
deactivating 6-9
field description 6-6
overview 6-8
setting up a test 6-9
warning about sample volume 2-4
"Remote Access" status 1-23
repeat for panics, automatic
activating 6-10
field description 6-6
report slips 6-11
warning about sample volume 2-4
"Replace IMT Fluids or Cartridge" 5-20
replacements
air filters 3-22
aliquot wheel 3-51
aliquot wheel home sensor 3-52
aliquot wheel lid open sensor 3-54
chemistry wash 2-53
cuvette diaphragm 3-55
cuvette film cartridge 3-58
cuvette ring sensor 3-60
diluent 2-58
Flex loader home sensor 3-61
Flex presence sensor 3-62
flush 2-58
fuses, card cage 3-63
heat torch assembly 3-64
HM fluids 2-53
HM incubate wheel home sensor 3-66
HM mixer assembly PC board 3-68
HM pump head 3-25
HM reagent probe cleaner 2-53
I-8
Results
store 6-90
rotary valve seal, IMT 3-88
rsdat.xls 6-88, 6-90, 6-91
rules, field definitions 6-49
Run key 1-18
S
safety 1-7
instrument removal 1-7
safety labels 1-8
safety power shutdown 1-14
salt bridge solution
priming with 5-19
replacing 2-58
sample area, cleaning 3-7
sample cups
adapters 2-4
dead volume 2-4
limited cup 2-29
short sample 2-29
using 2-4
volume 2-4
sample data
entering 2-11
screen fields 2-12
sample drain cleaning 3-46
sample ID, entering information 6-81
sample probe
alignment
maximum depth 4-39
overview 4-34
probe to aliquot wheel 4-41
probe to cup 4-36
probe to cuvette 4-35
probe to drain 4-37
probe to HM incubate wheel 4-38
cleaning 3-46
tip replacement 3-137
sample probe cleaner, replacing 2-53
sample status
determining 2-30
segment 2-34
viewing 2-30
sample tubes
bar code labels 2-9
fill guide 2-10
sample probe depth alignment 4-40
sample tube with bar code 2-27
short sample problem 2-27, 2-28
size requirements 2-5
types 2-5
sample tubing, replacing 3-140
sample wheel home sensor, replacing 3-142
2006/12
Index
sampler
system check specifications 3-9
system check troubleshooting 5-11
Sampler Busy status 1-22
sampler handler sensors, replacing 3-143
Sampler Idle status 1-22
Samplers Off status 1-22
samples
adding while processing 2-19
batch 2-14
dilution A-20
editing 2-45
entering and running batch 2-14
loading 2-16
mixture with known standard A-21
rerunning 2-45
running downloaded from an LIS 2-21
searching for 2-43
status 2-30
volume
adquate amount for processing 2-10
automatic dilution 6-33
reduced 6-39
screen areas
applications 1-25
error message 1-24
function keys 1-25
instrument status 1-22
message 1-25
operating conditions status 1-23
segment status 1-24
seals
IMT rotary valve 3-88
monopump piston lip 3-98
search protocol 2-44
segment status
area on screen 1-24
determining 2-34
viewing 2-34
segments, deleting 2-34
sensors
aliquot wheel home 3-52
aliquot wheel lid open 3-54
cuvette ring 3-60
Flex loader home 3-61
Flex presence 3-62
HM incubate wheel home 3-66
HM shuttle home 3-75
HM wash probe home 3-79
HM wash wheel home 3-66
IMT rotary valve 3-90
IMT sampler handler 3-94
monopump piston home 3-95
monopump position 3-101
photometer filter wheel 3-106
I-9
Index
I-10
2006/12
T
Tab key 1-20
Technical Assistance Center 5-4
telephone number xvii
temperature
room 1-29
system calibrating
cuvette 3-33
HM module 3-38
reagent 3-36
warm-up time 3-33
system specifications 3-9
temperature probe 3-33
test counters program 6-85
test keys 1-17, 6-94
test report
automatic reflex testing 6-11
automatic repeat for panics 6-11
customizing on external printer 6-61
interpreting 2-40
messages A-14, A-23
"Abnormal Assay" (abnl assay) 6-78
test results
displaying 2-42
reporting 2-38
reprinting 2-42
selecting a specific order 6-96
with reference range indicators 2-38, A-13
with test report messages 2-38, A-13
thermal chamber
lowering 3-31
raising 3-32
thermometer 3-33
third lot of reagent cartridge, using 2-52
threshold
calibration alert 2-66
reagent cartridge 2-47
supplies 2-47
"Timeout on IOC Read" error message 5-34
tip replacement
reagent probe 3-126
sample probe 3-137
2006/12
Index
U
U-seal element, replacing 3-149
undeleting QC results on Method Review screen 6-47
uninterruptible power source
description 1-30
icon A-7
shutdown 1-10, 1-15
urine samples, autodilute volumes 6-36
user-defined methods
calculation, defining
using a predefined template 7-12
writing your own 7-11
calibration 7-18
customer responsibility 7-4
defining reagent and sample deliveries 7-6
defining reagent cartridge configuration 7-9
entering method parameters 7-15
error messages 7-30
filling reagent cartridges 7-16
I-11
Index
identifying 7-5
loading reagent cartridges 7-17
method kinetics
reviewing 7-20
screen fields 7-21
using 7-22
overview 7-3
photometry reading times 7-8
programming
expressions 7-28
functions 7-29
implementation 7-25
overview 7-24
statements 7-26
structure 7-24
quality control 7-18
running 7-19
storing 7-14
worksheet 7-33
V
vacuum pump muffler filter, replacing 3-152
vacuum switch, replacing 3-153
verification of methods
acceptable results 2-78
accepting results 2-77
cancelling 2-79
printing results 2-78
review flow chart A-4
reviewing results 2-77
running 2-76
setting up 2-76
setup flow chart A-3
troubleshooting 2-79
volume
in SSC 2-8
volume, adequate for sample processing 2-8, 2-10
I-12
W
W tubing 3-83
W2 tubing 3-83, 3-84
Waiting... status 1-22
Waiting...60 status 1-22
warm-up time 1-29, 3-33
warnings
meaning of 1-8
shock 1-10
wash probes, HM 3-13
waste, cuvette 3-7
waste out option 6-6
waste tubing, IMT
cleaning 3-44, 3-45
replacing 3-83
water diluent bottle
cleaning 3-48
replacing 3-155
water diluent, requirements 1-29
water in option 6-6
wavelengths, optical filters 3-105
worksheets, user-defined methods 7-33
wrenches 3-127
X
X tubing 3-16
X0 tubing 3-92
X1 tubing 3-92
X2 tubing 3-83
2006/12
2006/12
Index
I-13
Index
I-14
2006/12